circabc.europa.eu · web viewinstallation of lighting (motorcycle) supplement 14 to the 01 series...

68
DISCUSSION PAPER This document does not represent an official position of the European Commission. It is a tool to explore the views of interested parties. The suggestions contained in this document do not prejudge the form and content of any possible future proposal by the European Commission. EN EN

Upload: trancong

Post on 02-Apr-2018

213 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

DISCUSSION PAPER

This document does not represent an official position of the European Commission It is a tool to explore the views

of interested parties The suggestions contained in this document do not prejudge the form and content of any possible future proposal by the European Commission

EN EN

EXPLANATORY MEMORANDUM

1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT

The term lsquoL-category vehiclesrsquo covers a wide range of light vehicle types with two three or four wheels eg powered cycles two- and three-wheel mopeds two- and three-wheel motorcycles motorcycles with side-cars and four-wheel vehicles (quadricycles) such as on-road quads all-terrain vehicles and quadrimobiles

Directive 200224EC1 and its implementing Directives listed in its Annex I which is the approval package for L-category vehicles in force is repealed by 31 December 2015 and subsequently replaced by Regulation (EU) No 16820132 and its four delegated and implementing acts

The European Commission has kept track of flaws in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its four delegated and implementing acts during the period March 2013 to 31 January 2015 in dedicated tracking lists that are regularly updated Also questions on interpretation of the text which were raised by stakeholders and authorities during this period and associated replies from the Commission have been collected since March 2013 As L-category vehicles could already be approved on a voluntary basis in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 1682013 as of 22 September 2014 any change of the wording deemed necessary to improve clarity of the text in the delegated acts has been included in this amending act

In order to ensure continuous improvement and adaptation to technical progress of this new legal package to approve L-category vehicles which is applicable on a mandatory basis as of 01 January 2016 and to address some flaws in the three delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 containing technical requirements and test procedures this amending act has been compiled and is proposed for adoption at the earliest possible delay

2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT

(a) Consultation of interested parties

Regularly the evolving tracking lists with flagged errors interpretation questions and comments have been shared with the participants of the Motor Cycle Working Group (MCWG) meetings and have been discussed at length

The consultation targeted the groups most affected including type-approval authorities manufacturers suppliers and consumers

The Commission has acknowledged the receipt of all questions from stakeholders and these plus the replies from the Commission have been made publicly available

Not only EU stakeholders have been consulted but also internationally at the level of the UNECE with contracting parties to the 1958 and 1998 Agreements have been requested to review the text and the tracking lists and to provide comments Additional questions raised by these international stakeholders and answers from the Commission have been included in the tracking lists which form the basis of this amending act

(b) Consultation methods main sectors targeted and general profile of respondents

The Commission consulted stakeholders in a number of ways

The public consultation covering possible controversial aspects of the Codecision proposal took place on the internet between 22 December 2008 and 27 February 2009 Reactions were received from

1 OJ L 124 952002 p 12 OJ L60 232013 p 52

EN 2 EN

Member States the L-category vehicle and component manufacturing industry transport organisations user organisations other non-governmental organisations and private individuals as well as from international stakeholders under the umbrella of the UNECE

The contents of the draft Codecision proposal and its supplementing draft delegated and implementing acts before adoption were discussed in all the meetings of the Commissionrsquos Working Group on L category vehicles (MCWG) in the period 2009 - 2013 The same approach has been followed with respect to some concerns that prevent flawless implementation of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 from 2013 onwards to date that are addressed in this amending act

Finally many bilateral meetings were held in which individual stakeholders could freely express their views and raise issues All those elements that need improvement to make this new package work in daily practice have been incorporated in this amending act

(c) Impact assessment

As this amending act only concerns changes seeking to clarify the text of the delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and improving wording in order to ensure flawless approvals in a timely manner without changing the intention of the base measures assessed in the base impact assessment conducted back in 2009 it was not deemed necessary to conduct a supplemental impact assessment in support of this amending act The results of the impact assessment 3 carried out in support of adopting Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its delegated and implementing acts remain valid

3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT

(a) Legal basis

The legal basis of this delegated act is Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles

(b) Choice of instruments

The use of a Regulation is considered to be appropriate in that it provides the required assurance for compliance while not requiring transposition into Member Statesrsquo legislation

The delegated act uses the lsquosplit-level approachrsquo originally introduced at the request of the European Parliament and used in other legislation for EU type-approval of motor vehicles This approach provides for legislation in three steps

ndash the fundamental provisions and scope are laid down by the European Parliament and the Council in Codecision Regulation (EU) No 1682013 based on Article 114 TFEU in accordance with the ordinary legislative procedure

ndash the technical specifications associated with the fundamental provisions are laid down in three delegated acts (Article 290)

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements for the approval of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the

3 SEC(2010) 1152

EN 3 EN

approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

ndash the administrative provisions regarding the information document the definitions in the type-approval certificate the certificate of conformity and associated production conformity requirements etc are laid down in

ndash Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 9012014 of 18 July 2014 implementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the administrative requirements for the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles

Clarifying amendments of the delegated and implementing acts shall follow the same adoption procedures as the base delegated and implementing acts Consequently this delegated act seeking to amend the three base delegated acts to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory procedure

EN 4 EN

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) hellip

of XXX

amending Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21

November 2013 with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements and Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 with regard to

environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V all supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and

quadricycles

(Text with EEA relevance)

THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION

Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union

Having regard to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles4 and in particular Articles 18(3) 20(2) 21(5) 22(5) 23(12) 24(3)[ 25(8)] 33(6) 54(3) and [57(12)] thereof

Whereas

(1) The European Commission has kept track of flaws flagged by approval authorities and stakeholders in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its four delegated and implementing acts during the period March 2013 to 31 January 2015 L-category vehicles could already be approved on a voluntary basis in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 1682013 as of 22 September 2014 any change of the wording deemed necessary to improve clarity of the text in the delegated acts has been included in this amending act In order to ensure continuous improvement and adaptation to technical progress of this legal package to approve L-category vehicles and to improve clarity in the three delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 containing technical requirements and test procedures this amending act has been compiled

(2) x

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION

Article 1

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements for the approval of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation

4 OJ L 60 232013 p 52

EN 5 EN

G 160915
REPPR RVFSR RVCR
G 160915
Recitals to be added2) RVFSR Annex XV tyres3) RVFSR Annex XVIII power limitation4) RVFSR Annex XIX structural integrity5) RVCR Annex II anti-tampering6) RVCR Annex III conversion7) RVCR Annex XII functional OBD8) REPPR Annex V test type IV evap9) REPPR Annex VI durability10) REPPR Annex IX sound
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR RVCR

Article 2

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

Article 3

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

Article 4

This Regulation shall enter into force on the first day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States

Done at Brussels

For the CommissionThe President[hellip]

EN 6 EN

Annex I Amendments of Regulation (EU) No 32014

1 Recital (4) is deleted

2 Recitals (5) to (12) are renumbered as follows

For lsquo(5)rsquo read lsquo(4)rsquo

Forrsquo(6)rsquo read lsquo(5)rsquo

Forrsquo(7)rsquo read lsquo(6)rsquo

Forrsquo(8)rsquo read lsquo(7)rsquo

Forrsquo(9)rsquo read lsquo(8)rsquo

Forrsquo(10)rsquo read lsquo(9)rsquo

Forrsquo(11)rsquo read lsquo(10)rsquo

Forrsquo(12)rsquo read lsquo(11)rsquo

3 Recital ( 8) is amended to read

lsquo(7) It is appropriate to include UNECE regulations Nos 1 3 6 7 8 16 19 20 28 37 38 39 43 46 50 53 56 57 60 72 74 75 78 81 82 87 90 98 99 112 113 in the list of UNECE regulations that apply on a compulsory basis set-out in Annex I to this Regulationrsquo

4 Article 3(2) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

5 The list in Annex I is amended to read

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

1 Headlamps for motor vehicles (R2 HS1) 02

OJ L 177 1072010

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

3 Retro-reflectorsSupplement 12 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

6 Direction indicators Supplement 25 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 1872014

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e

EN 7 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 19 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 177 1072010 p 40
G 160915
Peter please advise whether or not the latest OJ translation references should be incorporated in the list or left as is
G 160915
Added references consistent with Annex I in red
G 160915
Recital redundant with No 7

and L7e

7 Front and rear position lamps and stop lamps

Supplement 23 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 3009201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

8

Head lamps for motor vehicles (H1 H2 H3 HB3 HB4 H7 H8 H9 H11 HIR1 HIR2)

05OJ L 177 1072010

p 71

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

16 Safety belts restraint systems and child restraint systems

Supplement 1 to the 06 series of

amendments

OJ L 233 992011

p 1

L2e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

19 Front fog lampsSupplement 6 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 250 2282014

p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

20 Headlamps for motor vehicles (H4) 03

OJ L 177 1072010

p 170

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

28 Audible warning devicesSupplement 3 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 33

L3e L4e and L5e

37 Filament bulbsSupplement 42 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 18072014 p 36

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

38 Rear fog lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 20

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

39 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation

Supplement 5 to the original version of

the Regulation

OJ L 120 1352010 p

40

L1e L2e L3e L4e

L5e L6e and L7e

43 Safety glazingSupplement 2 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 42 1202201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

46 Devices for indirect vision (rear-view mirrors)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 237 882014

p 24

L2e L5e L6e and L7e

50 Lighting components for vehicles of category L

Supplement 16 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L97 29314

p1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

53 Installation of lighting Supplement 14 to OJ L 166 L3e

EN 8 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 4 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 211
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 34 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 297 13112010 p 1
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 113
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 16 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 148 1262010 p 1

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 2: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

EXPLANATORY MEMORANDUM

1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT

The term lsquoL-category vehiclesrsquo covers a wide range of light vehicle types with two three or four wheels eg powered cycles two- and three-wheel mopeds two- and three-wheel motorcycles motorcycles with side-cars and four-wheel vehicles (quadricycles) such as on-road quads all-terrain vehicles and quadrimobiles

Directive 200224EC1 and its implementing Directives listed in its Annex I which is the approval package for L-category vehicles in force is repealed by 31 December 2015 and subsequently replaced by Regulation (EU) No 16820132 and its four delegated and implementing acts

The European Commission has kept track of flaws in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its four delegated and implementing acts during the period March 2013 to 31 January 2015 in dedicated tracking lists that are regularly updated Also questions on interpretation of the text which were raised by stakeholders and authorities during this period and associated replies from the Commission have been collected since March 2013 As L-category vehicles could already be approved on a voluntary basis in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 1682013 as of 22 September 2014 any change of the wording deemed necessary to improve clarity of the text in the delegated acts has been included in this amending act

In order to ensure continuous improvement and adaptation to technical progress of this new legal package to approve L-category vehicles which is applicable on a mandatory basis as of 01 January 2016 and to address some flaws in the three delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 containing technical requirements and test procedures this amending act has been compiled and is proposed for adoption at the earliest possible delay

2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT

(a) Consultation of interested parties

Regularly the evolving tracking lists with flagged errors interpretation questions and comments have been shared with the participants of the Motor Cycle Working Group (MCWG) meetings and have been discussed at length

The consultation targeted the groups most affected including type-approval authorities manufacturers suppliers and consumers

The Commission has acknowledged the receipt of all questions from stakeholders and these plus the replies from the Commission have been made publicly available

Not only EU stakeholders have been consulted but also internationally at the level of the UNECE with contracting parties to the 1958 and 1998 Agreements have been requested to review the text and the tracking lists and to provide comments Additional questions raised by these international stakeholders and answers from the Commission have been included in the tracking lists which form the basis of this amending act

(b) Consultation methods main sectors targeted and general profile of respondents

The Commission consulted stakeholders in a number of ways

The public consultation covering possible controversial aspects of the Codecision proposal took place on the internet between 22 December 2008 and 27 February 2009 Reactions were received from

1 OJ L 124 952002 p 12 OJ L60 232013 p 52

EN 2 EN

Member States the L-category vehicle and component manufacturing industry transport organisations user organisations other non-governmental organisations and private individuals as well as from international stakeholders under the umbrella of the UNECE

The contents of the draft Codecision proposal and its supplementing draft delegated and implementing acts before adoption were discussed in all the meetings of the Commissionrsquos Working Group on L category vehicles (MCWG) in the period 2009 - 2013 The same approach has been followed with respect to some concerns that prevent flawless implementation of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 from 2013 onwards to date that are addressed in this amending act

Finally many bilateral meetings were held in which individual stakeholders could freely express their views and raise issues All those elements that need improvement to make this new package work in daily practice have been incorporated in this amending act

(c) Impact assessment

As this amending act only concerns changes seeking to clarify the text of the delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and improving wording in order to ensure flawless approvals in a timely manner without changing the intention of the base measures assessed in the base impact assessment conducted back in 2009 it was not deemed necessary to conduct a supplemental impact assessment in support of this amending act The results of the impact assessment 3 carried out in support of adopting Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its delegated and implementing acts remain valid

3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT

(a) Legal basis

The legal basis of this delegated act is Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles

(b) Choice of instruments

The use of a Regulation is considered to be appropriate in that it provides the required assurance for compliance while not requiring transposition into Member Statesrsquo legislation

The delegated act uses the lsquosplit-level approachrsquo originally introduced at the request of the European Parliament and used in other legislation for EU type-approval of motor vehicles This approach provides for legislation in three steps

ndash the fundamental provisions and scope are laid down by the European Parliament and the Council in Codecision Regulation (EU) No 1682013 based on Article 114 TFEU in accordance with the ordinary legislative procedure

ndash the technical specifications associated with the fundamental provisions are laid down in three delegated acts (Article 290)

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements for the approval of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the

3 SEC(2010) 1152

EN 3 EN

approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

ndash the administrative provisions regarding the information document the definitions in the type-approval certificate the certificate of conformity and associated production conformity requirements etc are laid down in

ndash Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 9012014 of 18 July 2014 implementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the administrative requirements for the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles

Clarifying amendments of the delegated and implementing acts shall follow the same adoption procedures as the base delegated and implementing acts Consequently this delegated act seeking to amend the three base delegated acts to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory procedure

EN 4 EN

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) hellip

of XXX

amending Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21

November 2013 with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements and Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 with regard to

environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V all supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and

quadricycles

(Text with EEA relevance)

THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION

Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union

Having regard to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles4 and in particular Articles 18(3) 20(2) 21(5) 22(5) 23(12) 24(3)[ 25(8)] 33(6) 54(3) and [57(12)] thereof

Whereas

(1) The European Commission has kept track of flaws flagged by approval authorities and stakeholders in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its four delegated and implementing acts during the period March 2013 to 31 January 2015 L-category vehicles could already be approved on a voluntary basis in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 1682013 as of 22 September 2014 any change of the wording deemed necessary to improve clarity of the text in the delegated acts has been included in this amending act In order to ensure continuous improvement and adaptation to technical progress of this legal package to approve L-category vehicles and to improve clarity in the three delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 containing technical requirements and test procedures this amending act has been compiled

(2) x

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION

Article 1

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements for the approval of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation

4 OJ L 60 232013 p 52

EN 5 EN

G 160915
REPPR RVFSR RVCR
G 160915
Recitals to be added2) RVFSR Annex XV tyres3) RVFSR Annex XVIII power limitation4) RVFSR Annex XIX structural integrity5) RVCR Annex II anti-tampering6) RVCR Annex III conversion7) RVCR Annex XII functional OBD8) REPPR Annex V test type IV evap9) REPPR Annex VI durability10) REPPR Annex IX sound
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR RVCR

Article 2

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

Article 3

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

Article 4

This Regulation shall enter into force on the first day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States

Done at Brussels

For the CommissionThe President[hellip]

EN 6 EN

Annex I Amendments of Regulation (EU) No 32014

1 Recital (4) is deleted

2 Recitals (5) to (12) are renumbered as follows

For lsquo(5)rsquo read lsquo(4)rsquo

Forrsquo(6)rsquo read lsquo(5)rsquo

Forrsquo(7)rsquo read lsquo(6)rsquo

Forrsquo(8)rsquo read lsquo(7)rsquo

Forrsquo(9)rsquo read lsquo(8)rsquo

Forrsquo(10)rsquo read lsquo(9)rsquo

Forrsquo(11)rsquo read lsquo(10)rsquo

Forrsquo(12)rsquo read lsquo(11)rsquo

3 Recital ( 8) is amended to read

lsquo(7) It is appropriate to include UNECE regulations Nos 1 3 6 7 8 16 19 20 28 37 38 39 43 46 50 53 56 57 60 72 74 75 78 81 82 87 90 98 99 112 113 in the list of UNECE regulations that apply on a compulsory basis set-out in Annex I to this Regulationrsquo

4 Article 3(2) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

5 The list in Annex I is amended to read

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

1 Headlamps for motor vehicles (R2 HS1) 02

OJ L 177 1072010

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

3 Retro-reflectorsSupplement 12 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

6 Direction indicators Supplement 25 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 1872014

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e

EN 7 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 19 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 177 1072010 p 40
G 160915
Peter please advise whether or not the latest OJ translation references should be incorporated in the list or left as is
G 160915
Added references consistent with Annex I in red
G 160915
Recital redundant with No 7

and L7e

7 Front and rear position lamps and stop lamps

Supplement 23 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 3009201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

8

Head lamps for motor vehicles (H1 H2 H3 HB3 HB4 H7 H8 H9 H11 HIR1 HIR2)

05OJ L 177 1072010

p 71

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

16 Safety belts restraint systems and child restraint systems

Supplement 1 to the 06 series of

amendments

OJ L 233 992011

p 1

L2e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

19 Front fog lampsSupplement 6 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 250 2282014

p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

20 Headlamps for motor vehicles (H4) 03

OJ L 177 1072010

p 170

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

28 Audible warning devicesSupplement 3 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 33

L3e L4e and L5e

37 Filament bulbsSupplement 42 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 18072014 p 36

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

38 Rear fog lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 20

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

39 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation

Supplement 5 to the original version of

the Regulation

OJ L 120 1352010 p

40

L1e L2e L3e L4e

L5e L6e and L7e

43 Safety glazingSupplement 2 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 42 1202201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

46 Devices for indirect vision (rear-view mirrors)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 237 882014

p 24

L2e L5e L6e and L7e

50 Lighting components for vehicles of category L

Supplement 16 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L97 29314

p1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

53 Installation of lighting Supplement 14 to OJ L 166 L3e

EN 8 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 4 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 211
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 34 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 297 13112010 p 1
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 113
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 16 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 148 1262010 p 1

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 3: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Member States the L-category vehicle and component manufacturing industry transport organisations user organisations other non-governmental organisations and private individuals as well as from international stakeholders under the umbrella of the UNECE

The contents of the draft Codecision proposal and its supplementing draft delegated and implementing acts before adoption were discussed in all the meetings of the Commissionrsquos Working Group on L category vehicles (MCWG) in the period 2009 - 2013 The same approach has been followed with respect to some concerns that prevent flawless implementation of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 from 2013 onwards to date that are addressed in this amending act

Finally many bilateral meetings were held in which individual stakeholders could freely express their views and raise issues All those elements that need improvement to make this new package work in daily practice have been incorporated in this amending act

(c) Impact assessment

As this amending act only concerns changes seeking to clarify the text of the delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and improving wording in order to ensure flawless approvals in a timely manner without changing the intention of the base measures assessed in the base impact assessment conducted back in 2009 it was not deemed necessary to conduct a supplemental impact assessment in support of this amending act The results of the impact assessment 3 carried out in support of adopting Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its delegated and implementing acts remain valid

3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT

(a) Legal basis

The legal basis of this delegated act is Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles

(b) Choice of instruments

The use of a Regulation is considered to be appropriate in that it provides the required assurance for compliance while not requiring transposition into Member Statesrsquo legislation

The delegated act uses the lsquosplit-level approachrsquo originally introduced at the request of the European Parliament and used in other legislation for EU type-approval of motor vehicles This approach provides for legislation in three steps

ndash the fundamental provisions and scope are laid down by the European Parliament and the Council in Codecision Regulation (EU) No 1682013 based on Article 114 TFEU in accordance with the ordinary legislative procedure

ndash the technical specifications associated with the fundamental provisions are laid down in three delegated acts (Article 290)

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements for the approval of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the

3 SEC(2010) 1152

EN 3 EN

approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

ndash the administrative provisions regarding the information document the definitions in the type-approval certificate the certificate of conformity and associated production conformity requirements etc are laid down in

ndash Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 9012014 of 18 July 2014 implementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the administrative requirements for the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles

Clarifying amendments of the delegated and implementing acts shall follow the same adoption procedures as the base delegated and implementing acts Consequently this delegated act seeking to amend the three base delegated acts to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory procedure

EN 4 EN

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) hellip

of XXX

amending Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21

November 2013 with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements and Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 with regard to

environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V all supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and

quadricycles

(Text with EEA relevance)

THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION

Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union

Having regard to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles4 and in particular Articles 18(3) 20(2) 21(5) 22(5) 23(12) 24(3)[ 25(8)] 33(6) 54(3) and [57(12)] thereof

Whereas

(1) The European Commission has kept track of flaws flagged by approval authorities and stakeholders in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its four delegated and implementing acts during the period March 2013 to 31 January 2015 L-category vehicles could already be approved on a voluntary basis in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 1682013 as of 22 September 2014 any change of the wording deemed necessary to improve clarity of the text in the delegated acts has been included in this amending act In order to ensure continuous improvement and adaptation to technical progress of this legal package to approve L-category vehicles and to improve clarity in the three delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 containing technical requirements and test procedures this amending act has been compiled

(2) x

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION

Article 1

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements for the approval of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation

4 OJ L 60 232013 p 52

EN 5 EN

G 160915
REPPR RVFSR RVCR
G 160915
Recitals to be added2) RVFSR Annex XV tyres3) RVFSR Annex XVIII power limitation4) RVFSR Annex XIX structural integrity5) RVCR Annex II anti-tampering6) RVCR Annex III conversion7) RVCR Annex XII functional OBD8) REPPR Annex V test type IV evap9) REPPR Annex VI durability10) REPPR Annex IX sound
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR RVCR

Article 2

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

Article 3

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

Article 4

This Regulation shall enter into force on the first day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States

Done at Brussels

For the CommissionThe President[hellip]

EN 6 EN

Annex I Amendments of Regulation (EU) No 32014

1 Recital (4) is deleted

2 Recitals (5) to (12) are renumbered as follows

For lsquo(5)rsquo read lsquo(4)rsquo

Forrsquo(6)rsquo read lsquo(5)rsquo

Forrsquo(7)rsquo read lsquo(6)rsquo

Forrsquo(8)rsquo read lsquo(7)rsquo

Forrsquo(9)rsquo read lsquo(8)rsquo

Forrsquo(10)rsquo read lsquo(9)rsquo

Forrsquo(11)rsquo read lsquo(10)rsquo

Forrsquo(12)rsquo read lsquo(11)rsquo

3 Recital ( 8) is amended to read

lsquo(7) It is appropriate to include UNECE regulations Nos 1 3 6 7 8 16 19 20 28 37 38 39 43 46 50 53 56 57 60 72 74 75 78 81 82 87 90 98 99 112 113 in the list of UNECE regulations that apply on a compulsory basis set-out in Annex I to this Regulationrsquo

4 Article 3(2) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

5 The list in Annex I is amended to read

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

1 Headlamps for motor vehicles (R2 HS1) 02

OJ L 177 1072010

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

3 Retro-reflectorsSupplement 12 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

6 Direction indicators Supplement 25 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 1872014

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e

EN 7 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 19 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 177 1072010 p 40
G 160915
Peter please advise whether or not the latest OJ translation references should be incorporated in the list or left as is
G 160915
Added references consistent with Annex I in red
G 160915
Recital redundant with No 7

and L7e

7 Front and rear position lamps and stop lamps

Supplement 23 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 3009201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

8

Head lamps for motor vehicles (H1 H2 H3 HB3 HB4 H7 H8 H9 H11 HIR1 HIR2)

05OJ L 177 1072010

p 71

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

16 Safety belts restraint systems and child restraint systems

Supplement 1 to the 06 series of

amendments

OJ L 233 992011

p 1

L2e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

19 Front fog lampsSupplement 6 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 250 2282014

p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

20 Headlamps for motor vehicles (H4) 03

OJ L 177 1072010

p 170

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

28 Audible warning devicesSupplement 3 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 33

L3e L4e and L5e

37 Filament bulbsSupplement 42 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 18072014 p 36

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

38 Rear fog lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 20

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

39 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation

Supplement 5 to the original version of

the Regulation

OJ L 120 1352010 p

40

L1e L2e L3e L4e

L5e L6e and L7e

43 Safety glazingSupplement 2 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 42 1202201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

46 Devices for indirect vision (rear-view mirrors)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 237 882014

p 24

L2e L5e L6e and L7e

50 Lighting components for vehicles of category L

Supplement 16 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L97 29314

p1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

53 Installation of lighting Supplement 14 to OJ L 166 L3e

EN 8 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 4 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 211
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 34 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 297 13112010 p 1
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 113
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 16 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 148 1262010 p 1

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 4: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

ndash Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

ndash the administrative provisions regarding the information document the definitions in the type-approval certificate the certificate of conformity and associated production conformity requirements etc are laid down in

ndash Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 9012014 of 18 July 2014 implementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the administrative requirements for the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles

Clarifying amendments of the delegated and implementing acts shall follow the same adoption procedures as the base delegated and implementing acts Consequently this delegated act seeking to amend the three base delegated acts to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory procedure

EN 4 EN

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) hellip

of XXX

amending Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21

November 2013 with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements and Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 with regard to

environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V all supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and

quadricycles

(Text with EEA relevance)

THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION

Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union

Having regard to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles4 and in particular Articles 18(3) 20(2) 21(5) 22(5) 23(12) 24(3)[ 25(8)] 33(6) 54(3) and [57(12)] thereof

Whereas

(1) The European Commission has kept track of flaws flagged by approval authorities and stakeholders in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its four delegated and implementing acts during the period March 2013 to 31 January 2015 L-category vehicles could already be approved on a voluntary basis in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 1682013 as of 22 September 2014 any change of the wording deemed necessary to improve clarity of the text in the delegated acts has been included in this amending act In order to ensure continuous improvement and adaptation to technical progress of this legal package to approve L-category vehicles and to improve clarity in the three delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 containing technical requirements and test procedures this amending act has been compiled

(2) x

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION

Article 1

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements for the approval of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation

4 OJ L 60 232013 p 52

EN 5 EN

G 160915
REPPR RVFSR RVCR
G 160915
Recitals to be added2) RVFSR Annex XV tyres3) RVFSR Annex XVIII power limitation4) RVFSR Annex XIX structural integrity5) RVCR Annex II anti-tampering6) RVCR Annex III conversion7) RVCR Annex XII functional OBD8) REPPR Annex V test type IV evap9) REPPR Annex VI durability10) REPPR Annex IX sound
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR RVCR

Article 2

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

Article 3

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

Article 4

This Regulation shall enter into force on the first day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States

Done at Brussels

For the CommissionThe President[hellip]

EN 6 EN

Annex I Amendments of Regulation (EU) No 32014

1 Recital (4) is deleted

2 Recitals (5) to (12) are renumbered as follows

For lsquo(5)rsquo read lsquo(4)rsquo

Forrsquo(6)rsquo read lsquo(5)rsquo

Forrsquo(7)rsquo read lsquo(6)rsquo

Forrsquo(8)rsquo read lsquo(7)rsquo

Forrsquo(9)rsquo read lsquo(8)rsquo

Forrsquo(10)rsquo read lsquo(9)rsquo

Forrsquo(11)rsquo read lsquo(10)rsquo

Forrsquo(12)rsquo read lsquo(11)rsquo

3 Recital ( 8) is amended to read

lsquo(7) It is appropriate to include UNECE regulations Nos 1 3 6 7 8 16 19 20 28 37 38 39 43 46 50 53 56 57 60 72 74 75 78 81 82 87 90 98 99 112 113 in the list of UNECE regulations that apply on a compulsory basis set-out in Annex I to this Regulationrsquo

4 Article 3(2) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

5 The list in Annex I is amended to read

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

1 Headlamps for motor vehicles (R2 HS1) 02

OJ L 177 1072010

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

3 Retro-reflectorsSupplement 12 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

6 Direction indicators Supplement 25 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 1872014

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e

EN 7 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 19 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 177 1072010 p 40
G 160915
Peter please advise whether or not the latest OJ translation references should be incorporated in the list or left as is
G 160915
Added references consistent with Annex I in red
G 160915
Recital redundant with No 7

and L7e

7 Front and rear position lamps and stop lamps

Supplement 23 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 3009201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

8

Head lamps for motor vehicles (H1 H2 H3 HB3 HB4 H7 H8 H9 H11 HIR1 HIR2)

05OJ L 177 1072010

p 71

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

16 Safety belts restraint systems and child restraint systems

Supplement 1 to the 06 series of

amendments

OJ L 233 992011

p 1

L2e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

19 Front fog lampsSupplement 6 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 250 2282014

p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

20 Headlamps for motor vehicles (H4) 03

OJ L 177 1072010

p 170

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

28 Audible warning devicesSupplement 3 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 33

L3e L4e and L5e

37 Filament bulbsSupplement 42 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 18072014 p 36

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

38 Rear fog lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 20

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

39 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation

Supplement 5 to the original version of

the Regulation

OJ L 120 1352010 p

40

L1e L2e L3e L4e

L5e L6e and L7e

43 Safety glazingSupplement 2 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 42 1202201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

46 Devices for indirect vision (rear-view mirrors)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 237 882014

p 24

L2e L5e L6e and L7e

50 Lighting components for vehicles of category L

Supplement 16 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L97 29314

p1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

53 Installation of lighting Supplement 14 to OJ L 166 L3e

EN 8 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 4 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 211
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 34 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 297 13112010 p 1
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 113
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 16 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 148 1262010 p 1

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 5: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) hellip

of XXX

amending Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21

November 2013 with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements and Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 with regard to

environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V all supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and

quadricycles

(Text with EEA relevance)

THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION

Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union

Having regard to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 January 2013 on the approval and market surveillance of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles4 and in particular Articles 18(3) 20(2) 21(5) 22(5) 23(12) 24(3)[ 25(8)] 33(6) 54(3) and [57(12)] thereof

Whereas

(1) The European Commission has kept track of flaws flagged by approval authorities and stakeholders in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and its four delegated and implementing acts during the period March 2013 to 31 January 2015 L-category vehicles could already be approved on a voluntary basis in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 1682013 as of 22 September 2014 any change of the wording deemed necessary to improve clarity of the text in the delegated acts has been included in this amending act In order to ensure continuous improvement and adaptation to technical progress of this legal package to approve L-category vehicles and to improve clarity in the three delegated acts supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 containing technical requirements and test procedures this amending act has been compiled

(2) x

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION

Article 1

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 32014 of 24 October 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to vehicle functional safety requirements for the approval of two- or three-wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation

4 OJ L 60 232013 p 52

EN 5 EN

G 160915
REPPR RVFSR RVCR
G 160915
Recitals to be added2) RVFSR Annex XV tyres3) RVFSR Annex XVIII power limitation4) RVFSR Annex XIX structural integrity5) RVCR Annex II anti-tampering6) RVCR Annex III conversion7) RVCR Annex XII functional OBD8) REPPR Annex V test type IV evap9) REPPR Annex VI durability10) REPPR Annex IX sound
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
REPPR
G 160915
RVFSR
G 160915
RVCR
G 160915
RVFSR RVCR

Article 2

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

Article 3

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

Article 4

This Regulation shall enter into force on the first day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States

Done at Brussels

For the CommissionThe President[hellip]

EN 6 EN

Annex I Amendments of Regulation (EU) No 32014

1 Recital (4) is deleted

2 Recitals (5) to (12) are renumbered as follows

For lsquo(5)rsquo read lsquo(4)rsquo

Forrsquo(6)rsquo read lsquo(5)rsquo

Forrsquo(7)rsquo read lsquo(6)rsquo

Forrsquo(8)rsquo read lsquo(7)rsquo

Forrsquo(9)rsquo read lsquo(8)rsquo

Forrsquo(10)rsquo read lsquo(9)rsquo

Forrsquo(11)rsquo read lsquo(10)rsquo

Forrsquo(12)rsquo read lsquo(11)rsquo

3 Recital ( 8) is amended to read

lsquo(7) It is appropriate to include UNECE regulations Nos 1 3 6 7 8 16 19 20 28 37 38 39 43 46 50 53 56 57 60 72 74 75 78 81 82 87 90 98 99 112 113 in the list of UNECE regulations that apply on a compulsory basis set-out in Annex I to this Regulationrsquo

4 Article 3(2) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

5 The list in Annex I is amended to read

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

1 Headlamps for motor vehicles (R2 HS1) 02

OJ L 177 1072010

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

3 Retro-reflectorsSupplement 12 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

6 Direction indicators Supplement 25 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 1872014

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e

EN 7 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 19 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 177 1072010 p 40
G 160915
Peter please advise whether or not the latest OJ translation references should be incorporated in the list or left as is
G 160915
Added references consistent with Annex I in red
G 160915
Recital redundant with No 7

and L7e

7 Front and rear position lamps and stop lamps

Supplement 23 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 3009201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

8

Head lamps for motor vehicles (H1 H2 H3 HB3 HB4 H7 H8 H9 H11 HIR1 HIR2)

05OJ L 177 1072010

p 71

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

16 Safety belts restraint systems and child restraint systems

Supplement 1 to the 06 series of

amendments

OJ L 233 992011

p 1

L2e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

19 Front fog lampsSupplement 6 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 250 2282014

p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

20 Headlamps for motor vehicles (H4) 03

OJ L 177 1072010

p 170

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

28 Audible warning devicesSupplement 3 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 33

L3e L4e and L5e

37 Filament bulbsSupplement 42 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 18072014 p 36

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

38 Rear fog lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 20

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

39 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation

Supplement 5 to the original version of

the Regulation

OJ L 120 1352010 p

40

L1e L2e L3e L4e

L5e L6e and L7e

43 Safety glazingSupplement 2 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 42 1202201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

46 Devices for indirect vision (rear-view mirrors)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 237 882014

p 24

L2e L5e L6e and L7e

50 Lighting components for vehicles of category L

Supplement 16 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L97 29314

p1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

53 Installation of lighting Supplement 14 to OJ L 166 L3e

EN 8 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 4 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 211
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 34 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 297 13112010 p 1
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 113
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 16 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 148 1262010 p 1

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 6: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Article 2

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 442014 of 21 November 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to the vehicle construction and general requirements for the approval of two- or three- wheel vehicles and quadricycles is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation

Article 3

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1342014 of 16 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 1682013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to environmental and propulsion unit performance requirements and amending Annex V thereof is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation

Article 4

This Regulation shall enter into force on the first day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States

Done at Brussels

For the CommissionThe President[hellip]

EN 6 EN

Annex I Amendments of Regulation (EU) No 32014

1 Recital (4) is deleted

2 Recitals (5) to (12) are renumbered as follows

For lsquo(5)rsquo read lsquo(4)rsquo

Forrsquo(6)rsquo read lsquo(5)rsquo

Forrsquo(7)rsquo read lsquo(6)rsquo

Forrsquo(8)rsquo read lsquo(7)rsquo

Forrsquo(9)rsquo read lsquo(8)rsquo

Forrsquo(10)rsquo read lsquo(9)rsquo

Forrsquo(11)rsquo read lsquo(10)rsquo

Forrsquo(12)rsquo read lsquo(11)rsquo

3 Recital ( 8) is amended to read

lsquo(7) It is appropriate to include UNECE regulations Nos 1 3 6 7 8 16 19 20 28 37 38 39 43 46 50 53 56 57 60 72 74 75 78 81 82 87 90 98 99 112 113 in the list of UNECE regulations that apply on a compulsory basis set-out in Annex I to this Regulationrsquo

4 Article 3(2) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

5 The list in Annex I is amended to read

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

1 Headlamps for motor vehicles (R2 HS1) 02

OJ L 177 1072010

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

3 Retro-reflectorsSupplement 12 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

6 Direction indicators Supplement 25 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 1872014

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e

EN 7 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 19 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 177 1072010 p 40
G 160915
Peter please advise whether or not the latest OJ translation references should be incorporated in the list or left as is
G 160915
Added references consistent with Annex I in red
G 160915
Recital redundant with No 7

and L7e

7 Front and rear position lamps and stop lamps

Supplement 23 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 3009201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

8

Head lamps for motor vehicles (H1 H2 H3 HB3 HB4 H7 H8 H9 H11 HIR1 HIR2)

05OJ L 177 1072010

p 71

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

16 Safety belts restraint systems and child restraint systems

Supplement 1 to the 06 series of

amendments

OJ L 233 992011

p 1

L2e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

19 Front fog lampsSupplement 6 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 250 2282014

p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

20 Headlamps for motor vehicles (H4) 03

OJ L 177 1072010

p 170

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

28 Audible warning devicesSupplement 3 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 33

L3e L4e and L5e

37 Filament bulbsSupplement 42 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 18072014 p 36

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

38 Rear fog lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 20

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

39 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation

Supplement 5 to the original version of

the Regulation

OJ L 120 1352010 p

40

L1e L2e L3e L4e

L5e L6e and L7e

43 Safety glazingSupplement 2 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 42 1202201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

46 Devices for indirect vision (rear-view mirrors)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 237 882014

p 24

L2e L5e L6e and L7e

50 Lighting components for vehicles of category L

Supplement 16 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L97 29314

p1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

53 Installation of lighting Supplement 14 to OJ L 166 L3e

EN 8 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 4 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 211
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 34 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 297 13112010 p 1
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 113
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 16 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 148 1262010 p 1

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 7: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Annex I Amendments of Regulation (EU) No 32014

1 Recital (4) is deleted

2 Recitals (5) to (12) are renumbered as follows

For lsquo(5)rsquo read lsquo(4)rsquo

Forrsquo(6)rsquo read lsquo(5)rsquo

Forrsquo(7)rsquo read lsquo(6)rsquo

Forrsquo(8)rsquo read lsquo(7)rsquo

Forrsquo(9)rsquo read lsquo(8)rsquo

Forrsquo(10)rsquo read lsquo(9)rsquo

Forrsquo(11)rsquo read lsquo(10)rsquo

Forrsquo(12)rsquo read lsquo(11)rsquo

3 Recital ( 8) is amended to read

lsquo(7) It is appropriate to include UNECE regulations Nos 1 3 6 7 8 16 19 20 28 37 38 39 43 46 50 53 56 57 60 72 74 75 78 81 82 87 90 98 99 112 113 in the list of UNECE regulations that apply on a compulsory basis set-out in Annex I to this Regulationrsquo

4 Article 3(2) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

5 The list in Annex I is amended to read

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

1 Headlamps for motor vehicles (R2 HS1) 02

OJ L 177 1072010

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

3 Retro-reflectorsSupplement 12 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

6 Direction indicators Supplement 25 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 1872014

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e

EN 7 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 19 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 177 1072010 p 40
G 160915
Peter please advise whether or not the latest OJ translation references should be incorporated in the list or left as is
G 160915
Added references consistent with Annex I in red
G 160915
Recital redundant with No 7

and L7e

7 Front and rear position lamps and stop lamps

Supplement 23 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 3009201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

8

Head lamps for motor vehicles (H1 H2 H3 HB3 HB4 H7 H8 H9 H11 HIR1 HIR2)

05OJ L 177 1072010

p 71

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

16 Safety belts restraint systems and child restraint systems

Supplement 1 to the 06 series of

amendments

OJ L 233 992011

p 1

L2e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

19 Front fog lampsSupplement 6 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 250 2282014

p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

20 Headlamps for motor vehicles (H4) 03

OJ L 177 1072010

p 170

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

28 Audible warning devicesSupplement 3 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 33

L3e L4e and L5e

37 Filament bulbsSupplement 42 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 18072014 p 36

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

38 Rear fog lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 20

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

39 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation

Supplement 5 to the original version of

the Regulation

OJ L 120 1352010 p

40

L1e L2e L3e L4e

L5e L6e and L7e

43 Safety glazingSupplement 2 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 42 1202201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

46 Devices for indirect vision (rear-view mirrors)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 237 882014

p 24

L2e L5e L6e and L7e

50 Lighting components for vehicles of category L

Supplement 16 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L97 29314

p1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

53 Installation of lighting Supplement 14 to OJ L 166 L3e

EN 8 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 4 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 211
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 34 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 297 13112010 p 1
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 113
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 16 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 148 1262010 p 1

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 8: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

and L7e

7 Front and rear position lamps and stop lamps

Supplement 23 to the 02 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 3009201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

8

Head lamps for motor vehicles (H1 H2 H3 HB3 HB4 H7 H8 H9 H11 HIR1 HIR2)

05OJ L 177 1072010

p 71

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

16 Safety belts restraint systems and child restraint systems

Supplement 1 to the 06 series of

amendments

OJ L 233 992011

p 1

L2e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

19 Front fog lampsSupplement 6 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 250 2282014

p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

20 Headlamps for motor vehicles (H4) 03

OJ L 177 1072010

p 170

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

28 Audible warning devicesSupplement 3 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 323 6122011

p 33

L3e L4e and L5e

37 Filament bulbsSupplement 42 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 213 18072014 p 36

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

38 Rear fog lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 20

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

39 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation

Supplement 5 to the original version of

the Regulation

OJ L 120 1352010 p

40

L1e L2e L3e L4e

L5e L6e and L7e

43 Safety glazingSupplement 2 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 42 1202201

4 p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

46 Devices for indirect vision (rear-view mirrors)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 237 882014

p 24

L2e L5e L6e and L7e

50 Lighting components for vehicles of category L

Supplement 16 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L97 29314

p1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

53 Installation of lighting Supplement 14 to OJ L 166 L3e

EN 8 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 4 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 211
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 34 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 297 13112010 p 1
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 03 series of amendmentsOJ L 177 1072010 p 113
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 16 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 148 1262010 p 1

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 9: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

(motorcycle) the 01 series of amendments

1862013 p 55

56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such 01

OJ L89 25314 p

1

L1e L2e and L6e

57 Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such 02

OJ L130 1514 p

45

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

60 Identification of controls tell-tales and indicators

Supplement 4 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 297 15102014 p 23

L1e and L3e

72Headlamps for motorcycles and vehicles treated as such (HS1)

01OJ L 75

1432014 p 1

L3e L4e L5e and L7e

74 Installation of lighting (moped)

Supplement 7 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 166 1862013

p 88L1e

75 TyresSupplement 13 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ L 84 3032011

p 46

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

78 Braking including anti-lock and combined brake systems

Corrigendum 2 to the 03 series of

amendments

OJ L 24 3012015

p 30

L1e L2e L3e L4e and L5e

81 Rear-view mirrorsSupplement 2 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 185 1372012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

82 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles treated as such (HS2) 01

OJ L 89 2532014

p 92

L1e L2e and L6e

87 Daytime running lampsSupplement 15 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 4 712012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

90Replacement brake lining assemblies and drum brake linings

02OJ L 185 1372012

p 24

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

98 Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources

Supplement 4 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 64L3e

99 Gas-discharge light sourcesSupplement 9 to the 00 series of

amendments

OJ L 285 30092014 p 35

L3e

112 Headlamps with asymmetrical Supplement 4 to OJ L 250 L1e L2e

EN 9 EN

G 160915
Current versionSupplement 12 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 230 3182010 p 264
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 5 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 164 3062010 p 151
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 3 to the 02 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 67
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 00 series of amendmentsOJ L 95 3132004 p 10

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 10: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

beams the 01 series of amendments

2282014 p 67

L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

113 Headlamps with symmetrical beams

Supplement 3 to the 01 series of

amendments

OJ 176 1462014

p 128

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

6 Point 43 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo43 Driving backwards

It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function in an uncontrolled manner whilst the vehicle is in forward motion (ie no sudden and strong deceleration or wheel lock) however it is permitted that the vehicle is slowed down graduallyrsquo

7 Point 414 of Annex IV is amended to read

lsquo414 If the on-board REESS can be externally charged by the driver vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be impossible as long as the connector of the external electric power supply is physically connected to the vehicle inlet For vehicles of category L1e with a mass in running order le 35 kg vehicle movement by its own propulsion system shall be inhibited as long as the connector of the battery charger is physically connected to the external electric power supply Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by using the connector or battery charger specified by the vehicle manufacturer In case of permanently connected charge cables the requirement above is deemed to be met when use of the charge cable obviously prevents the use of the vehicle (eg cable is always routed over operator controls riderrsquos saddle driverrsquos seat handle bar or steering wheel or the seat covering the cable storage space needs to remain in open position)rsquo

8 In point 111 of Part 1 of Annex VII the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 43

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

9 Points 1111 and 1112 of Annex VIII are amended to read

lsquo1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted notably that any customised appearance of the provided symbols shall be prohibited

1112 Small irregularities concerning line thickness the marking application and other relevant production tolerances shall be accepted as provided in paragraph 4 of ISO 25752010Amd12011 (design principles)rsquo

11 Point 112 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo112 Where automatically switched-on headlamp or daytime running lamp activation is linked to the running of an engine this shall be construed as being linked to the master control switch having been activated with the vehicle in normal operation mode in case of

EN 10 EN

G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text1111 It shall be ensured that no deviations in the shape and orientation of the provided symbols are permitted1112 It shall further be ensured that the corresponding requirements of points 2 to 2216 are met with respect to functions for which no symbol is provided in UNECE regulation No 60 but for which symbols are provided in this Regulation
G 160915
Added sentence marked in red
G 160915
Current text 43 Driving backwards It shall not be possible to activate the vehicle reverse control function whilst the vehicle is in forward motion
G 160915
Current versionSupplement 2 to the 01 series of amendmentsOJ L 330 16122005 p 214

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 11: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

vehicles with electric or other alternative propulsion unit systems and vehicles equipped with an automatic stopstart system of the propulsion unitrsquo

12 In point 23118 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 23

lsquoOJ L 237 882014rsquo

13 In point 23158 of Annex IX the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 91

lsquoOJ L 4 712012 p 27rsquo

14 Points 11 and 111 of Annex XV are amended to read

lsquo11 Subject to the provisions of points 111 to 112 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75

111 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met

the tyres are type-approved according to Directive 9223EC5 Regulation (EC) No 66120096 or UNECE regulation No 106 and

the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of this exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo

15 Points 12 of Annex XV is deleted

16 Points 22 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo22 The vehicle manufacturer may restrict the category of use of original and replacement tyres that may be installed on the vehicle In this case the categories of use of tyres that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be clearly stated in the vehicles instruction manualrsquo

17 Point 221 of Annex XV is deleted

18 Point 23 of Annex XV is amended to read

lsquo23 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos permissible overall dimensions in the form of a

5 OJ L 129 1451992 p 956 OJ L 200 3172009 p 1

EN 11 EN

G 160915
Current text23 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 22 to 221 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all points
G 160915
Current text22 The space in which each wheel revolves shall be such as to allow unrestricted movement when using the maximum permissible size of tyres and rim widths taking into account the minimum and maximum wheel off-sets if applicable within the minimum and maximum suspension and steering constraints as declared by the vehicle manufacturer This shall be verified by performing the checks for the largest and the widest tyre in each space taking into account the applicable rim size and the maximum allowed section width and outer diameter of the tyre in relation to the tyre size designation as specified in the applicable legislation The checks shall be performed by rotating a representation of the tyrersquos maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in question
G 160915
Current textlsquo 12 Where a vehicle is designed for conditions of use which are incompatible with the characteristics of tyres type- approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 and it is therefore necessary to fit tyres with different characteristics the requirements of point 11 do not apply provided that the following conditions are met mdash the tyres are type-approved according to Council Directive 9223EEC ( 1 ) Regulation (EC) No 6612009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 2 ) or UNECE regulation No 106 and mdash the approval authority and technical service are satisfied that the tyres fitted are suitable for the operating conditions of the vehicle The nature of the exemption and reasons for acceptance shall be clearly stated in the test reportrsquo
G 160915
Current text lsquolsquo11 Subject to the provisions of point 12 all tyres fitted to vehicles including any spare tyre shall be type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75rsquo111 Tyres which are deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L2e and L5e in accordance with UNECE regulation No 75 shall be deemed suitable for fitment on vehicles of categories L6e and L7ersquo

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 12: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

maximum envelope not just the actual tyre in the space for the wheel in questionrsquo

19 Points 231 232 and 24 are inserted after point 23 as follows

lsquo231 All tyres without prejudice to their categories of use that may be fitted to the vehicle shall be taken into account for the determination of the permissible overall dimensions (ie the maximum envelope) of the relevant tyre as applicable in the Union legislation at the time of type-approval testing of the vehicle For this purpose either the specifications as provided in Annex 5 of UNECE Regulation No 75 or the permitted percentages as provided for sizes not included in that Annex shall be taken into account (eg overall width of multiservice tyres (MST) +25 normal and snow service tyres +10 in case of rim diameter code 13 and above and +8 in case of rim diameter codes up to 12 inclusive)rsquo

232 In addition the permissible dynamic growth of the height of bias and biasbelted construction tyres which are type-approved according to UNECE regulation No 75 depends on the speed category and the category of use of the tyre To ensure an appropriate selection of bias and biasbelted replacement tyres for the end-user of the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer shall take into account both the permitted categories of use as well as the speed category that is compatible with the maximum design vehicle speed for the determination of the permitted tolerance laid down in point 41 of Annex 9 to UNECE regulation No 75 (ie Hdyn = H 110 up to Hdyn = H 118) More stringent categories may be taken into account at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer

24 The technical service may agree to an alternative test procedure (eg virtual testing) to verify that the requirements of point 23 to 232 are met provided that the clearance between the tyrersquos maximum envelope and vehicle structure exceeds 10 mm at all pointsrsquo

20 In point 21 of Annex XVI the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE Regulation No 104

lsquoOJ L 75 1432014 p 29rsquo

21 Point 331 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo331 The plate shall be perpendicular (plusmn 5deg) to the longitudinal plane of the vehiclersquo

22 Point 361 of Annex XVI is amended to read

lsquo361 If the upper edge of the plate is no more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

mdash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

mdash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15deg to the horizontal

mdash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

23 Point 362 of Annex XVI is amended to read

EN 12 EN

G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 13: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

lsquo362 If the upper edge of the plate is more than 120 m from the ground surface the plate shall be visible in the whole space included within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30ordm in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15ordm to the horizontal

ndash the plane touching the lower edge of the plate and forming an angle measured downwards of 15ordm to the horizontalrsquo

24 Point 11631 of Annex XVII is inserted after point 1163

lsquo11631 However in case the level of the instrument panel is located above the level of the horizontal plane coinciding with the R-point of the seating position of the driver a knee-form testing apparatus shall be used above the upper horizontal boundary of interior zone 2 to assess contactable edges of the instrument panel as well as any elements mounted directly onto it located below the level of the instrument panel The technical service shall clearly indicate in the test report which parts of the interior are deemed instrument panel and relevant elements in agreement with the type-approval authority The steering control shall be disregarded for the determination of the level of the instrument panelrsquo

25 Point 221 of Annex XVII is amended to read

lsquo221 In this zone as well as that covered by point 11631 a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregardedrsquo

26 Points 24 to 242 of Annex XVII are inserted after point 232

lsquo24 Interior zones 1 2 and 3

241 Radii of contactable edges that cannot be determined accurately with the use of conventional measuring tools (eg radius gauge) due to oblique corners limited protrusions character or style lines ribs and bumps as well as surface graining are deemed in compliance with the requirements provided that such edges are at least blunted

242 The vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply in full all relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 217 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering the entire not just portions of the interiorrsquo

27 Point 11211 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo11211 Adjustment of the spark properties in order to limit the maximum design vehicle speed andor maximum power shall be allowed only for (sub)categories L3e-A2

7 OJ L 188 1672008 p 32

EN 13 EN

G 160915
Added additional sub categories for which power vehicle speed limitation may be achieved by excessive spark retard
G 160915
Current text221 In this zone a knee-form testing apparatus shall be moved from any given starting location in a horizontal and forward direction while the orientation of the X-axis of the device may be varied within the specified limits All contactable edges except those mentioned below shall be rounded with a radius of curvature of at least 32 mm Contacts made with the rear face of the device shall be disregarded
G 160915
Added sentence part marked in red

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 14: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

( only if maximum net power ge 20 kW) L3e-A3 L4e-A L5e L6eB and L7eCrsquo

28 Point 1125 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo1125 At least two of the limitation methods used as referred to in points 1121 to 1124 shall operate independently of each other be different in nature and have different design philosophies although they may apply similar elements (eg both methods based on the notion of rotation speed as a criterion but one measured inside a motor and the other in the drive-trainrsquos transmission) Failure of one method to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other methods In this case the maximum power andor vehicle speed which can be attained may be lower than under normal conditions In no case the maximum power andor vehicle speed may be higher than demonstrated at type-approval if one out of the two redundant restriction methods is eliminatedrsquo

29 The following points 1126 to 1129 are added to Annex XVIII

lsquo1126 The vehicle manufacturer shall be allowed to make use of limitation methods other than those listed in points 1121 to 1124 if the manufacturer can prove to the technical service to the satisfaction of the approval authority that these alternative limitation methods meet the principles of redundancy set out in point 1125 and providing at least two out of the four parameters (limitation of fuel mass air mass spark delivery or drivetrain rotation limitation) listed in point 1121 are applied in this alternative redundant limitation strategy

1127 The manufacturer shall be allowed to combine two or more of the individual limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 as part of a limitation strategy Such combination of limitation methods that work together to achieve a limitation shall be regarded as one limitation method from a minimum of two limitation methods as prescribed in point 1125

1128 Individual limitation methods or combinations of limitation methods referred to in points 1121 to 1124 are allowed to be applied more than once on condition that their multiple applications operate independently of each other as prescribed in point 1125 so that failure of one of the applications to work as intended (eg due to tampering) shall not impair the limitation function of other application of the same limitation method or same combination of methods

1129 A limitation strategy that in case of some failure (eg due to tampering) includes the activation of a special operating mode such as for example a lsquolimp homersquo operating mode with substantially reduced maximum vehicle speed andor maximum power not suitable for normal operation or that activates an ignition interlock preventing the engine from running for as long as the failure remains shall be regarded as one limitation methodrsquo

30 Point 114 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquoThe provision and use of any other means enabling the vehicle operator to adjust set select or alter the maximum propulsion unit performance (ie not to exceed Annex I Part B point 28 item 182 to 189 of Regulation (EU) No 9012014) directly or indirectly (eg high performance switch special encoded recognition transponder in ignition key physical or electronic jumper setting selectable option through electronic menu programmable feature of control unit) is prohibitedrsquo

EN 14 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 15: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

31 Point 21 of Annex XVIII is amended to read

lsquo21 The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1129 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

32 Point 111 of Annex XIX is amended to read

lsquo111 Vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-B shall be designed and constructed as to conform with all prescriptions regarding requirements and test methods laid down for handlebar stem-assembly seat-post front forks and frames as encompassed in standard ISO 42102014 irrespective of any scope mismatch in that technical standard The minimum value of the required test forces shall be in accordance with Table 19-1 in point 15rsquo

33 Point 12 of Annex XIX is amended as follows

For

lsquodrivetrainrsquo

read

lsquopowertrainrsquo

34 Point 15 is added to Annex XIX

lsquo15

Subject Name of test Reference of test which shall be used

Minimum value of the required test force or minimum number of test cycles

Handlebar and stem

Lateral bending test (static test)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 43 800 N (= Force F2)

Fatigue test (Stage 1 ndash Out of phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49 270 N (= Force F6)

Fatigue test (Stage 2 ndash In phase loading)

ISO 4210-52014 test method 49

2014 test method 49

370 N (= Force F7)

Frame

Fatigue test with pedalling forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 43

1000 N (= Force F1)

Fatigue test with horizontal forces

ISO 4210-62014 test method 44

C1 = 100000 (=Number of test cycles)

Fatigue test with a vertical force

ISO 4210-62014 test method 45

1100 N (= Force F4)

Front fork Static bending test ISO 4210-62014 test method 53

1500 N (= Force F5)

EN 15 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current text21 All items shall be verified The vehicle manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance with the specific requirements of points 11 to 1125 by proving that two or more of the methods implemented by integrating specific devices andor functions in the vehicle propulsion system ensure the required maximum continuous rated or net power andor maximum vehicle speed limitation and that each method does so in a fully independent mannerrsquo

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 16: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Seat-post

Stage 1 fatigue test ISO 4210-92014 test method 452

1100 N (= Force F3)

Stage 2 static strength test

ISO 4210-92014 test method 453

2000 N (= Force F4)

Table 19-1 Test and minimum forces or number of test cycles for vehicles of category L1e-A and cycles designed to pedal of vehicle category L1e-Brsquo

EN 16 EN

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 17: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Annex IIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 442014

1 Recital 11 is amended to read

rsquo(11) On-board diagnostics (lsquoOBDrsquo) is essential for effective and efficient repair and maintenance of vehicles Accurate diagnostics allows the repairer to identify fast which smallest exchangeable unit has to be repaired or replaced In order to address the rapid technical developments in the area of propulsion control systems it is appropriate to review the list of devices monitored for electric circuit malfunctions in 2017 By 31 December 2018 it should be established whether identified if additional devices and malfunctions should be added to the list set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XII to provide sufficient time to the Member States vehicle manufacturers their suppliers and the repair industry to adapt before the entry into force of OBD stage II PID $1C on the applicable on-board diagnostic system should be programmed to $00 as long as its value has not been standardised for L-category vehicles Starting as of the publication date of the revised standard ISO 15031-520xx and containing such a standardised value dedicated to L-category vehicles this standardised value shall be programmed as response to the PID $1C request of a generic scan toolrsquo

2 A new Recital 24 is added as follows

rsquo(24) This Regulation also sets out specific requirements for a subcategory L3e-A2 motorcycle which is designed by the vehicle manufacturer to convert it at a later point in time after having been made available on the market into a L3e-A3 configuration or vice versa The prerequisite for combining the approval of such a motorcycle type in both its L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations is that the vehicle manufacturer already submits the intention that this motorcycle type is designed to be converted into both configurations during type-approval and that the motorcycle type will meet the requirements set out in point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation at the stage of type-approval Any other retroactive conversion of a L3e-A2 subcategory motorcycle into a L3e-A3 subcategory motorcycle or vice versa shall follow the applicable approval procedure laid down in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 separately For such motorcycle types that are compliant with point 4 to Annex III of this Regulation a statutory plate is to be fitted in accordance with point 2 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In particular populating the appropriate fields on the statutory plate by the vehicle manufacturer with respect to stationary noise in both configurations as well as the maximum net power in L3e-A2 configuration before the motorcycle is made available on the market should be respected An example of such a statutory plate is shown in point 5 of Appendix 1 to Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

3 Article 3(3) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

Read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

4 The table in Annex I is amended to read

EN 17 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 18: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

lsquoList of UNECE regulations which apply on a compulsory basis

UNECE regulation

No

Subject Series of amendments

OJ reference

Applicability

10 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Supplement 1 to the 04 series of

amendments

OJ L 254 2092012

p 1

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

62 Protection against unauthorised use

Supplement 2 to 00 series of amendments

OJ L 89 2732013

p 37

L1e L2e L3e L4e L5e L6e and L7e

Explanatory note The fact that a component is included in this list does not make its installation mandatory For certain components however mandatory installation requirements are laid down in other annexes to this Regulationrsquo

5 Point 2311 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

6 Point 2312 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquocylinderpiston combinationrsquo

read

lsquocylinder pistonrsquo

7 Point 29 of Annex II is added

lsquo29 Prescriptions related to anti-tampering and manually or electronically adjustable multi-mode exhaust or silencing systems

291 All exhaust or silencing systems shall be constructed in a way that does not easily permit removal of baffles exit-cones and other parts whose primary function is as part of the silencingexpansion chambers Where incorporation of such a part is unavoidable its method of attachment shall be such that removal is not easily facilitated (eg with conventional threaded fixings) and shall also be attached so that removal causes permanentirrecoverable damage to the exhaust silencer assembly

292 Exhaust or silencing systems with manually or electronically controlled multiple adjustable operating modes shall meet all requirements in all operating modes The reported noise levels at type-approval shall be those resulting from the mode with the highest noise levels

293 The manufacturer shall not intentionally alter adjust or introduce any device or procedure solely for the purpose of fulfilling the sound requirements to obtain type-

EN 18 EN

G 160915
Part of UN R9 R41 R63 and R92 agreed to incorporate to converge EU approval requirements before acceding to these UN Regs and updated for technical progress (electronically controlled multiple mode silencer systems

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 19: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

approval which will not be operational during typical on-road operationrsquo

8 The numbering of point 3212 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo3212rsquo read lsquo3213rsquo

9 The numbering of points 35 351 and 352 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo35rsquo read lsquo33rsquo

For lsquo351rsquo read lsquo331rsquo

For 352rsquo read lsquo332rsquo

10 Point 41 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo41 Engine and Exhaust system

Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of points 322 323 and 33rsquo

11 Point 51 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo51 Any variant or version under the same type of vehicle of subcategory L3e-A2 or of subcategory L4e-A2 that are complying with the conversion requirements set out in point 4 of Annex III shall not be derived from a L3e-A3 or L4e-A3 type variant of version with more than twice the maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power of that power of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle configurationrsquo

12 The numbering of points 523 to 527 of Annex II is amended as follows

For lsquo523rsquo read lsquo522rsquo

For lsquo524rsquo read lsquo523rsquo

For lsquo525rsquo read lsquo524rsquo

For lsquo526rsquo read lsquo525rsquo

For lsquo527rsquo read lsquo526rsquo

13 Point 6 is added to Annex II as follows

lsquo6 Marking of parts equipment and components for identification and tampering prevention

61 The parts equipment and components listed below shall be durably and indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of such (replacement) parts equipment or components Such marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being destroyed

62 In general this marking referred to in point 61 shall be visible without the necessity of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the vehicle However where the bodywork or other parts of the vehicle obscure a marking the vehicle manufacturer shall provide the

EN 19 EN

G 160915
Cf Point 310 of Annex to Chapter 7 of 9724EC on anti-tampering (p 366) combined with point Deleted requirements on anti-tampering plate and stickers both for original and non-original replacement parts Additional anti-tampering plate is not deemed cost beneficial Marking of CVT has been added to the list of marking requirements based on conclusions in report on tampering prevention measures
G 160915
Current text lsquo51 For vehicles of subcategory L3e-A2 or L4e-A2 vehicle any variant or version among the same type shall not have a maximum net engine power andor maximum continuous rated power that exceed the double of that powerrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquolsquo41 Subcategory L3e-A1 and L4e-A1 vehicles shall comply with the requirements of either point 321 3221 or 3231 and comply with the requirements set out in points 3232 and 3233rsquo

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 20: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

competent authorities with indications for opening or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the markings

63 The characters figures or symbols used shall be at least 25 mm in height and be easily legible However for the marking of parts such as those specified in points 643 647 or 6411 the marking requirements set out in Annex XII to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be respected

64 The parts equipment and components referred to in point 611 are the following

641 any electricalelectronic device for the purpose of combustion engine or electric propulsion motor management (ECU ignition module injectors intake air temperature etc)

642 carburettor or equivalent device

643 catalytic converter(s) (only if not integrated in the silencer)

644 crankcase

645 cylinder

646 cylinder head

647 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer)

648 inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder or crankcase)

649 intake silencer (air filter)

6410 restricted section (sleeve or other)

6411 noise abatement device (silencer(s))

6412 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6413 transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)

6414 transmission CVT

6415 transmission controllerrsquo

14 Point 425 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo425 All other type-approval requirements than the ones listed in point 422 423 and 424 and which are set out in Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 shall be regarded as common and equal between the (L3eL4e)-A2 and (L3eL4e)-A3 motorcycle configurations and shall therefore only be tested and reported once for both performance configurations For the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle all other type-approval requirements than the

EN 20 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence addedCurrent last sentencelsquoFor the systems components separate technical units parts or equipment of the vehicle unaffected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 21: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

ones affected by the conversion it shall be allowed to use the same test reportsrsquo

15 Point 426 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo426 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A2 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval numberrsquo

16 Point 427 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo427 One WVTA shall be issued for the category (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle having a unique type-approval number Both type-approval numbers referred to in point 426 and 427 shall be stamped into the statutory plate in accordance with Article 39 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and with Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In order to facilitate the conversion of subcategory (L3eL4e)-A2 into the (L3eL4e)-A3 configuration motorcycle and vice versa a template for a corresponding vehicle manufacturers statement shall be attached to the information folder in accordance with Appendix 24 of part B of Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 9012014 In addition the dedicated entries for both the L3e-A2 and L3e-A3 configurations on the certificate of conformity shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with the template set out in Annex IV of Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

17 Point 4210 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4210 The Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall be filled out in accordance with the requirements set out in point 17 of Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 9012014rsquo

18 Point 4211 of Annex III is amended to read

lsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle configuration shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear a clear indication of the stationary noise levels in both configurations as well as the maximum net or maximum continuous rated power in the (L3eL4e)-A2 configurationrsquo

19 Point 442 of Annex III is deleted

20 The row in Table 3-1 of point 61 of Annex III with regard to lsquoSection (A2) of Annex IIrsquo is amended to read

lsquo

Requirements listed in Regulation (EU) No 1682013

Virtual andor self-testing applicable

Subject RestrictionsComments

Section (A2) of Annex II

Self-testing Testing procedures on maximum design vehicle speed

Only for subcategories L3e L4e and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing

rsquo

EN 21 EN

G 160915
Current text in cell restrictions commentsOnly for subcategories L3e- A3 L4e-A3 and L5e and does not include any other propulsion unit performance testing
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquo4211 Only one vehicle identification number (VIN) of the (L3eL4e)-A2 and A3 motorcycle type shall be assigned to motorcycles which can be converted from subcategories (L3eL4e)-A2 to (L3eL4e)-A3 or vice versa The statutory plate fitted on the vehicle shall contain this VIN and shall bear the two EU type-approval numbers with clear indication of the stationary noise levels and engine powers in both configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe Certificate of Conformity (CoC) shall only bear the data of one vehicle configuration either (L3eL4e)-A2 or (L3eL4e)-A3 at the end of the production line in the factory when finally set to one of the two possible configurationsrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the L3e-A3 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number The special section in the information document as referred to in point 412 shall be added into the type-approval file of the L3e-A3 vehiclersquo
G 160915
Current text lsquoOne WVTA shall be issued for the category L3e-A2 motorcycle having a unique EU type-approval number A special section in the information document and in the type-approval certificate shall reflect the information on the type-designation type-approval number technical data of the converted vehicle as well as the description of the parts software etc to convert the vehicle into the L3e-A3 configuration

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 22: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

21 Point 41131 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

22 Point 411311 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

23 Point 41131113 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

24 Point 41131122 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

25 Point 41131123 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

26 Point 411321 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

27 Point 411331 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

EN 22 EN

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 23: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

28 Point 411333 is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

29 Point 4114 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquotailpipe and CO2 emissionsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant and CO2 emissionsrsquo

30 Point 411323 of Annex IV is amended to read

For

lsquothe tailpipe emission limitsrsquo

read

lsquotailpipe pollutant emission limitsrsquo

31 The numbering of the equation in points 411324 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-2rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

32 The numbering of the equation in point 411334 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-3rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

33 The numbering of the equation in point 411336 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-4rsquo

read

EN 23 EN

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 24: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

lsquoEquation 4-5rsquo

34 Equation 4-1 in point 411311111 of Annex IV is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 4-1 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 4-1 if x le b then if x gt b then y = xrsquo

35 The numbering of points 112 to 1131 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo112rsquo read lsquo111rsquo

For lsquo1121rsquo read lsquo1111rsquo

For lsquo1122rsquo read lsquo1112rsquo

For lsquo113rsquo read lsquo112rsquo

For lsquo1131rsquo read lsquo1121rsquo

36 The numbering of point 1132 of Annex VIII is amended as follows and the point is amended to read

lsquo1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 268 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138rsquo

37 The numbering of points 114 to 1142 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For lsquo114rsquo read lsquo113rsquo

For lsquo1141rsquo read lsquo1131rsquo

For lsquo11411rsquo read lsquo11311rsquo

For lsquo1142rsquo read lsquo1132rsquo

38 Point 123 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo123 The testing device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of the vehicle in a smooth motion on both sides of it If the testing device contacts the steering control or any parts mounted on it it shall be rotated away into its fully locked position during and after which the test continues The testing device shall remain in contact with the vehicle or rider during the test (see Figure 8-2)

8 OJ L 215 1482010 p 27

EN 24 EN

bxay

bxay

G 160915
Current textOLD 1122 = NEW 1112 All contactable projections or edges which are made of or covered with material such as soft rubber or soft plastic having a hardness of less than 60 Shore (A) are considered to meet the requirements in points 13 to 138 The hardness measurement shall be carried out with the material fitted to the vehicle as intended This point is not relevantOLD 1132 = NEW 1122 In the case of vehicles fitted with a form of structure or panels intended to partially or fully enclose the rider passenger or luggage or to cover certain vehicle components the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative choose to apply the relevant requirements of UNECE regulation No 26 as prescribed for vehicle category M1 covering either specific external projections or the full external surface of the vehicle The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 1 to 138

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 25: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Figure 8-2 Test device movement zonesrsquo

39 Point 1231 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1231 The front of the vehicle shall be the first point of contact and the testing device shall move sideways in an outward direction following the contour of the vehicle and the rider if applicable The testing device shall also be allowed to move inward at a rate not exceeding the rate of rearward movement (ie at an angle of 45 in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle)rsquo

40 Point 1332 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1332 If a radius is applied to the upper edge it shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the windscreen or fairing as measured at the upper edgersquo

41 Point 1352 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo1352 The radius as applied to the leading edge of the front mudguard shall not be larger than 070 times the thickness of the mudguard as measured at the leading edge (eg in case of a round bead on the edge of sheet metal the diameter of the bead is taken as the relevant thickness)rsquo

42 Point 21211 of Annex VIII is amended to read

lsquo21211 However bearing in mind the variety of forms of construction of these categories of vehicle and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with a device for reversing the vehicle manufacturer may as an alternative to the requirements in point 2121 choose to apply the requirements of points 11 to 1121 and points 12 to 138 as prescribed for vehicles of categories L1e and L3e covering specific external projections (eg of front forks wheels fenders mud guards and fairings and the rear section of vehicles not equipped with a device for reversing) of the vehicle to be type-

EN 25 EN

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 26: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

approved in agreement with the technical service and approval authority (eg for a type of vehicle which has the overall appearance of a motorcycle but which is equipped with three wheels classifying it as an L5e category vehicle)

This means that some portions of these kinds of vehicle may be assessed with the external projections testing device (see Appendix 1) and the remaining portions shall be assessed with the sphere measuring 100 mm in diameter (see UNECE Regulation No 26) In such cases particular attention should be given to the required radii whereas the amount of projection of handles hinges push-buttons and aerials do not need to be checked

The relevant external projections assessed in conformity with this clause shall be clearly identified in the information document and any remaining external surface shall comply with the requirements of points 2 to 21214rsquo

43 Point 221 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquoThe tank shall be subjected to a hydraulic internal pressure test which shall be carried out on an isolated unit complete with all its accessories The tank shall be completely filled with a non-flammable liquid having a density and a viscosity close to those of the fuel normally used or with water After all communication with the outside has been cut off the pressure shall be gradually increased through the pipe connection through which fuel is fed to the engine to the internal pressure specified in point 129 and this pressure shall be maintained for at least 60 secondsrsquo

44 Point 321 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo321 The permeability test as part of type IV testing referred to in Part A of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 without having to take into account any diffusion measurements for the purpose of the test in accordance with this Annex shall be carried out on a sufficient number of tanks for the purpose of testing in accordance with points 33 to 3751 This means that the total duration of this preconditioning procedure is the pre-storage period of at least four weeks followed by the subsequent eight-week stabilised condition storage periodrsquo

45 Point 331 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo331 The fuel tank is filled up to its total rated capacity with a mixture of 50 water and 50 ethylene glycol or with any other coolant which does not deteriorate the fuel tank material the cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 plusmn 2K (-30 plusmn 2C)

The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank during the test shall be 253 plusmn 2K (-20 plusmn 2C) The tank is cooled down to a corresponding ambient temperature The fuel tank may also be filled with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided that it is left at the test temperature for at least an hour

A pendulum is used for the test Its impact head shall have the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid with a radius of curvature of 30 mm at its peak and edges The freely moving mass of the pendulum shall have a mass of 15 kg plusmn 05 kg and the exerted pendulumrsquos energy shall not be less than 300 J for each impact on the fuel tank

The technical service may select any number of points on the fuel tank to be tested and these points shall reflect locations which are considered at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on the vehicle Non-metal shielding shall be

EN 26 EN

G 160915
Red marked sentence added

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 27: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

disregarded and frame tubing or chassis sections may be taken into account for the assessment of risk

More than one fuel tank may be used for the completion of all impacts provided that all fuel tanks to be used have undergone the permeability test

There shall be no leakage of liquid following a single impact at any one of the tested pointsrsquo

46 Point 341 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo341 The fuel tank shall be filled up to its total rated capacity the test liquid used being water at 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C) The tank shall then be subjected to an internal pressure equal to twice the relative service pressure (design pressure) or an overpressure of 30 kPa whichever is higher The tank shall remain closed and pressurised for a period of not less than five hours at an ambient temperature of 326 plusmn 2K (53 plusmn 2C)

The fuel tank shall not show signs of leakage and any temporary or permanent deformation which may arise shall not render it unusable Account shall be taken of specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the tank is to be assessedrsquo

47 Point 351 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo351 Six tensile test-pieces of approximately the same thickness are taken from flat or nearly flat faces of the completely new fuel tank Their tensile strength and elastic limits are established at 296 plusmn 2K (23 plusmn 2C) at an elongation rate of 50 mmmin The obtained values shall then be compared with the tensile strength and elasticity values obtained from similar tests carried out using a fuel tank which has undergone the permeability test The material shall be considered to be acceptable if the tensile strength differs by no more than 25rsquo

48 Point 361 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo361 The fuel tank shall be fitted to a representative part of the vehicle and filled to 50 of its total rated capacity with water at 293 plusmn 2K (20 plusmn 2C) The test setup including the fuel tank shall then be placed in an ambient temperature of 343 plusmn 2K (70 plusmn 2C) for 60 minutes after which the fuel tank shall not display any permanent deformation or leaks and shall be in fully usable conditionrsquo

49 Point 3743 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo3743 The average combustion time (ACT) and average combustion length (ACL) shall be calculated if no sample out of ten or no more than one out of 20 has burnt up to the 100 mm mark

Equation 9-1

ACT (s) = ((ti mdash 30)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is rounded up or down to the nearest five-second increment However an ACT of 0 seconds shall not be used (ie if the combustion lasts between less than 2 seconds and 7 seconds the ACT is 5 seconds if the combustion lasts between 8 and

EN 27 EN

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 28: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

12 seconds the ACT is 10 seconds if the combustion lasts between 13 and 17 seconds the ACT is 15 seconds etc)

Equation 9-2

ACL (mm) = ((100 mdash unburnt lengthi)(n))

(note n = number of samples)

The result is expressed in relation to the nearest 5 mm increment (ie lsquoless than 5 mmrsquo shall be stated if the combustion length is less than 2 mm and thus in no case can an ACL of 0 mm be given)

Where a single sample out of 20 burns up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the combustion length (ie the value of (100 mdash unburnt length i) for that sample) shall be taken as 100 mm

Equation 9-3

in

This value shall be compared against the requirement as laid down in points 375 to 3751rsquo

50 Point 16 of Appendix 1 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquo16 Ground clearancersquo

161 For the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of any L-category vehicle type the test vehicle shall be loaded to the actual mass

162 As exemption from point 161 for the purpose of measuring the ground clearance of a subcategory L3e-AxE vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Enduro motorcycle) or a subcategory L3e- AxT vehicle type (x = 1 2 or 3 two-wheel Trial motorcycle) the test Enduro or Trial motorcycle shall be loaded to its mass in running order

163Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting allowing the minimum distance between vehicle and ground plane

164 The shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC25 This minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

51 Point 47 is added to Annex XII

The same vehicle family criteria laid down in table 11-1 in point 31of Annex XI to Regulation (EU) No 1342014 with regard to test type VIII shall also be applicable for the functional on-board diagnostic requirements set out in this Annex XII

52 Table 12-1 in point 222 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo

EN 28 EN

ACTACLn speed_combustion_average

smm

G 160915
Current textlsquo16 With regard to the ground clearance of a vehicle which is loaded to the actual mass the shortest distance between the ground plane and the lowest fixed point of the vehicle shall be measured between the axles and under the axle(s) if applicable in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to Directive 200746EC ( 1 ) Any manually or automatically adjustable suspension system fitted to the vehicle possibly resulting in a variable ground clearance shall be put to its minimum setting The minimum measured distance shall be regarded as the ground clearance of the vehiclersquo

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 29: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Topic Paragraph in this Annex and in Appendix 1

General disable criterion for degradation type of diagnostics in OBD stage II

3211

Catalytic converter monitoring 3321 3331

EGR efficiency flow monitoring 3344

In-use performance monitoring 2nd sub point of point 33 of Appendix 1 point 4 of Appendix 1

General OBD stage II requirement 33 of Appendix 1

Misfire detection 322 3322 353 362 371 312 of Appendix 1

NOx after-treatment system monitoring 3335 3336

Oxygen sensor deterioration monitoring 3323

Particulate filter monitoring 3332

Particulate matter (PM) emission monitoring 3325

rsquo

53 The numbering of points 322 3221 and 3221 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For lsquo322rsquo read lsquo322rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3221rsquo

For lsquo3221rsquo read lsquo3222rsquo

54 The references in point 36 of Annex XII are amended as follows

For lsquo3225rsquo read lsquo335rsquo

For lsquo3226rsquo read lsquo336rsquo

55 Point 43 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3321 3322 and 3323 for positive-ignition engines and points 3331 3332 and 3333 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

56 Point 44 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquo44 Prior to or at the time of type-approval no deficiency shall be granted with regard to the requirements set out in point 3 of Appendix 1 except the requirements laid down in point 311 of Appendix 1rsquo

57 The second subparagraph of Point 313 of Appendix 1 to Annex XII is amended to read

lsquoUntil a standardised connection interface for L-category vehicles has been adopted and published at ISO or CEN level and the reference of this technical standard is

EN 29 EN

G 160915
Current textForlsquoAt the request of the vehicle manufacturer an alternative connection interface may be used Where an alternative connection interface is used the vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adapter shall be provided in a non-discriminating manner to all independent operatorsrsquo
G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added
G 160915
Current textlsquoIn the identified order of deficiencies those relating to points 3331 3332 and 3333 for positive-ignition engines and points 3341 3342 and 3343 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified firstrsquo

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 30: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

included in this Regulation an alternative connection interface may be installed at the request of the vehicle manufacturer Where such an alternative connection interface is installed the vehicle manufacturer shall make available to test equipment manufacturers the details of the vehicle connector pin configuration free of charge The vehicle manufacturer shall provide an adapter enabling connection to a generic scan tool Such an adaptor shall be of suitable quality for professional workshop use It shall be provided upon request to all independent operators in a non-discriminating manner Manufacturers may charge a reasonable and proportionate price for this adaptor taking into account the additional costs caused for the customer by this choice of the manufacturer The connection interface and the adapter may not include any specific design elements which would require validation or certification before use or which would restrict the exchange of vehicle data when using a generic scan toolrsquo

58 The 4th sub-title cell under item lsquoCircuit rationalityrsquo in Table Ap2-1 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended as follows

For

lsquoDevice operationalDevice presentrsquo

read

lsquoDevice not operational Device not presentrsquo

59 Point 262 of Appendix 2 of Annex XII is amended to read

lsquomonitoring of some of the items listed in Table Ap2-1 is physically not possible and a deficiency has been granted for this incomplete monitor The comprehensive technical justification why such an OBD monitor cannot run shall be added to the information folderrsquo

60 Point 1411 in Annex XIV is inserted after point 141

lsquo1411 Although vehicle registration authorities should not require registration plates to exceed the dimensions as laid down in point 141 for the relevant vehicle categories (ie a registration plate measuring 210 mm times 140 mm is clearly not suitable for an L1e category vehicle) vehicle manufacturers may provide larger spaces than required on voluntary basis to accommodate alternative registration plate sizes that are optionally available in certain Member Statesrsquo

61 Point 15151 in Annex XIV is amended to read

lsquo15151 The plate shall be visible in the whole space within the following four planes

ndash the two vertical planes touching the two lateral edges of the plate and forming an angle measured outwards to the left and to the right of the plate of 30 in relation to the longitudinal plane parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle passing through the centre of the plate

ndash the plane touching the upper edge of the plate and forming an angle measured upwards of 15 to the horizontal

ndash the horizontal plane through the lower edge of the platersquo

EN 30 EN

G 160915
Red marked part of sentence added

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 31: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

62 Point 2351 in Annex XVI is inserted after point 235

lsquo2351 However in derogation to points 121 and 235 a prop stand fitted to a vehicle of category L3e-A1E L3e-A2E L3e-A3E L3e-A1T L3e-A2T or L3e-A3T may swing back automatically when not being held or supported by a personrsquo

EN 31 EN

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 32: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Annex IIIAmendments of Regulation (EU) No 1342014

1 Recital (7) is amended as follows

For

lsquocost-effectiversquo

read

lsquocost beneficialrsquo

2 Recital (8) is amended to read

lsquoA standardised method for measuring vehiclesrsquo energy efficiency (fuel or energy consumption carbon dioxide emissions as well as electric range) is necessary to ensure that no technical barriers to trade arise between Member States and also to ensure that customers and users are supplied with objective and precise informationrsquo Until a harmonised test procedure is agreed upon for category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 320149 these category L1e vehicle types may be exempted from the electric range test

3 Article 2(16) is amended as follows

For

lsquoehaustrsquo

read

lsquoexhaustrsquo

4 In Article 2(42) the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 85

lsquoOJ L 326 24112006 p 55rsquo

5 Article 3(4) is amended as follows

For

lsquoManufacturersrsquo

read

lsquoManufacturers of parts and equipmentrsquo

6 In the list of Annexes the row on Annex No VII is amended as follows

For

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

9 OJ L7 1012014 p1

EN 32 EN

G 160915
Added words marked red
G 160915
Add red marked sentence

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 33: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

Read

lsquo

VII Test type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range 207

rsquo

7 The numbering of the Equation 2-7 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation 2-7 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation 2-7a rsquo

8 Equation 2-3 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo rsquo

9 Equation 2-4 in point 455211 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 2 to ng -1

rsquo

10 Equation 2-5 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

i = 4 to ng

rsquo

11 Equation 2-6 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 33 EN

G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 34: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

rsquo

12 Equation 2-8 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

13 Equation 2-9 in point 455212 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

14 Equation 2-33 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

15 Equation 2-34 in point 61142 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

16 Point 61142 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

17 Equation 2-36 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

EN 34 EN

6C

HCm 10HC

dVS1HC

6C

COm 10CO

dVS1CO

G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator
G 160915
Deleted +75 in denominator

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 35: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

18 Equation 2-37 in point 61143 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

19 Point 61143 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

20 Equation 2-38 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo rsquo

21 Equation 2-39 in point 61144 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

22 Point 61144 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

23 Equation 2-44 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

24 Equation 2-45 in point 61145 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

EN 35 EN

6hCX

NOXm 10KNO

dVS1NO

2

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
Replaced 103 with 106
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 36: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

rsquo

25 Point 61145 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

26 Equation 2-47 in point 61146 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

27 Point 61146 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoDF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

read

lsquoDiF is the coefficient defined in point 61147rsquo

28 Point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquoDilution factor (DiF)rsquo

29 Equation 2-48 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

30 Equation 2-51 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

rsquo

31 The header of Table 1-8 in point 61147 of Annex II is amended as follows

EN 36 EN

G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 37: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

For

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DFrsquo

read

lsquoFactor lsquoXrsquo in formulae to calculate DiFrsquo

32 The abbreviation DF referred to in Table Ap 1-1 in Appendix 1 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

lsquo

33 Point 611511 of Annex II is amended as follows

For

lsquoWeighting of results from UNECE regulation No 40 and regulation No 47 test cyclesrsquo

read

lsquoWeighting of results from ECE R40 and ECE R47 test cyclesrsquo

34 In point 11 of Appendix 2 of Annex II the following reference is added in a footnote to UNECE regulation No 83 Revision 4

lsquoOJ L 42 12022014 p 1rsquo

35 Table Ap11-2 in Appendix 11 to Annex II is amended to read

lsquo

Hybrid-modes -rsaquo

-Pure electric

- Hybrid

-Pure fuel-

consuming

- Hybrid

-Pure electric

-Pure fuel-consuming- Hybrid

-Hybrid mode n1

-Hybrid mode m1

Battery state of charge

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Switch in position

Condition AFully charged

Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid

Most electric hybrid mode2

Condition BMin state of charge

Hybrid Fuel-consuming

Fuel-consuming

Most fuel-consuming

mode3

() For instance sport economic urban extra-urban position etc(2) Most electric hybrid mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest

electricity consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance with condition A of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE Regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

(3) Most fuel-consuming mode the hybrid mode which can be proven to have the highest fuel consumption of all selectable hybrid modes when tested in accordance

EN 37 EN

G 160915
Columns are shifted in current text should be the same as table in point 413 of Annex 8 to UN R101
G 160915
NB DF = Dilution Factor in the current text of Annex II However DF = Deterioration Factor in Annex VI which is the correct expression

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 38: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

with condition B of point 4 of Annex 10 to UNECE regulation No 101 to be established based on information provided by the manufacturer and in agreement with the technical service

rsquo

36 Point 11 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoAs of the date of first application laid down in Annex IV to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 fuel system permeation shall be tested in accordance with the test procedure laid down in point 2 This base requirement shall apply to all applicable L-category vehicles equipped with a fuel tank to store liquid high volatile fuel as applicable for a vehicle equipped with a positive ignition combustion engine in accordance with Part B of Annex V to Regulation (EU) No 1682013 and pending the results of the environmental effect study laid down in Article 23 of Regulation (EU) No 1682013 In order to satisfy the evaporative emission test requirements set out in Regulation (EU) No 1682013 L-vehicle (sub-)categories L3e L4e L5e-A L6e-A and L7e-A shall only be testedrsquo

37 Point 31 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

38 Point 44 of Appendix 2 to Annex V is amended to read

For

lsquo3012 plusmn 2 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

read

lsquo3012 plusmn 5 K (28 plusmn 5 degC)rsquo

39 The first sentence of point 441 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquoThe fuel tank heating system shall consist of at least two separate heat sources with two temperature controllersrsquo

40 Point 472 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended as follows

For

lsquoAppendix 1rsquo

read

lsquoAppendix 4rsquo

41 Table Ap3-1 in point 523 of Appendix 3 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquoTable Ap3-1

SHED test ndash minimum and maximum soak periods

Engine capacity Minimum (hours) Maximum (hours)

EN 38 EN

G 160915
Current table contains mathematical inconsistent boundaries in the engine capacity column
G 160915
Added sentence marked red

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 39: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

lt 170 cm3 6 36

170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3 8 36

ge 280 cm3 12 36

rsquo

42 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively An initial vapour temperature up to 5 degC above 210 degC may be used For this condition the vapour shall not be heated at the beginning of the diurnal test When the fuel temperature has been raised to 55 degC below the vapour temperature by following the Tf function the remainder of the vapour heating profile shall be followed

43 Points 5315 of Annex II is amended to read

lsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 140 degC

(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)

(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time

(3) Close and seal enclosure doors

As soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 155 degC plusmn 1 degC the test procedure shall continue as follows

(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i pi and Ti for the tank heat build test

(b) a linear heat build of 133 degC or 20 degC plusmn 05 degC over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the function below to within plusmn 17 degC or the closest possible function as described in 44

For exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-1

Tf = 03333 t + 155 degC

Tv = 03333 t + 210 degC

For non-exposed type of fuel storage tanks

Equations B33-2

Tf = 02222 t +155 degC

Tv = 02222 t + 210 degC

where

Tf = required temperature of fuel (degC)

Tv = required temperature of vapour (degC)

EN 39 EN

G 160915
Current textlsquo5316 As soon as the fuel temperature reaches 2870 K (140 degC)(1) Install the fuel filler cap(s)(2) Turn off the purge blowers if not already off at that time(3) Close and seal enclosure doorsAs soon as the fuel reaches a temperature of 2887 K (155 degC) plusmn 1 K the test procedure shall continue as follows(a) the hydrocarbon concentration barometric pressure and the temperature shall be measured to give the initial readings CHC i Pi and Ti for the tank heat build test(b) a linear heat build of 138 K or 20 plusmn 05 K over a period of 60 plusmn 2 minutes shall begin The temperature of the fuel and fuel vapour during the heating shall conform to the result of equation Ap3-1 within plusmn 17 K or the closest possible function as described in 443For exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-1Tf = 03333 t + 2885Tv = 03333 t + 2940For non-exposed type fuel tanksEquations Ap3-2Tf = 02222 t + 2885Tv = 02222 t + 2940whereTf = required temperature of fuel (K)Tv = required temperature of vapour (K)t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo
G 160915
Current textlsquo5315 The fuel and vapour may be artificially heated to the starting temperatures of 2887 K (155 degC) and 2942 K (210 degC) plusmn 1 K respectively

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 40: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

t = time from start of the tank heat build in minutesrsquo

44 Figure Ap32-1 in point 2 of Appendix 32 of Annex V is amended to read

lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing

Figure Ap32-1

Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports

A carbon canister representative of the propulsion family of the vehicle as set out in Annex XI shall be selected as test canister and shall be marked in agreement with the approval authority and the technical servicersquo

45 Point 31 of Appendix 3 to Annex V is amended to read

lsquo31 The durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable and be representative for the operation conditions of these parts during the useful life of the vehicle if used under normal conditions and serviced in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations The accumulated distance and operation conditions of the type V durability test may be regarded as representative for the useful life of the vehicle orrsquo

46 Point 312 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)

Figure 5-1

Test type V ndash durability test procedure with full distance accumulation

EN 40 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 312 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-1 lsquoFull mileage accumulation durability cyclersquo
G 160915
Current textlsquoThe durability test shall actuate control valves cables and linkages where applicable for a minimum of 5 000 cyclesrsquo
G 160915
Current graph

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 41: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

rsquo

47 Point 322 of Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)

Figure 5-2

Test type V ndash accelerated durability test procedure with partial distance accumulation

rsquo

EN 41 EN

G 160915
Current text in point 322 is not modified only text block in Fig 5-2 lsquoPartial mileage accumulation minimum 50 of assigned distancersquo

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 42: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

48 Point 26 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo26 Vehicle classification for the type V test

261 For the purpose of accumulating distance in the SRC-LeCV the L-vehicle categories shall be grouped in accordance with Table Ap1-1

Table Ap1-1

L-vehicle category groups for the SRC-LeCV

Cyc

le

WM

TC

C

lass

1) Vehicle maximum design speed (kmh)

2) Maximum net or continuous rated

power (kW)

11

vmax le 50 kmh le 6 kW

2 50 kmh lt vmaxlt 100 kmh lt 14 kW

3 2 100 kmh le vmaxlt 130 kmh ge 14 kW

4 3 130 kmh le vmax -

where

Vd = engine displacement volume in cm3

vmax = maximum design vehicle speed in kmh

262 The application of the vehicle classification criteria in Table Ap1-1 shall be performed by applying the following classification criteria hierarchy

1) Maximum design vehicle speed (kmh)

2) maximum net or continuous rated power (kW)

262 If

a) the acceleration capability of the L-category vehicle is not sufficient to carry out the acceleration phases within the prescribed distances or

b) the prescribed maximum vehicle speed in the individual cycles cannot be achieved owing to a lack of propulsion power or

c) the maximum design vehicle speed is restricted to a vehicle speed lower than the prescribed SRC-LeCV vehicle speed

the vehicle shall be driven with the accelerator device fully open until the vehicle speed prescribed for the test cycle is reached or until the limited maximum design vehicle speed is reached Subsequently the cycle shall be carried on as prescribed for the vehicle category Significant or frequent deviations from the prescribed vehicle speed tolerance band and the associated justification shall be reported to the approval authority and be included in the type V test report

EN 42 EN

G 160915
Point 262 to resolve practical differences for eg L7e-B or L7e-C vehicles that are categorised to ride cycle 3 owing to the approved power (15 kW) but which are limited in max vehicle speed to 90 kmh and therefore not capable of attaining a prescribed vehicle speed of 100 kmh in the second lap In that case the throttle needs to be opened fully and instead of 100 kmh 90 kmh may be driven The obvious justification is that the vehicle is designed to only meet 90 kmh Consequently despite frequent test cycle violations the test type V is still declared valid

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 43: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

49 Point 2734 of Appendix 1 to Annex VI is amended to read

lsquo2734 coast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch engaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessary

50 The title of Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoTest type VII requirements on energy efficiency CO2 emissions fuel consumption electric energy consumption and electric range

51 Equation Ap3-6 in point 341 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

52 Equation Ap3-21 in point 441 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquoM2 = m2 Dtest2 (gkm)rsquo

53 Point 1431 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5)

Equation Ap1-1

FC = (0118D) middot ((0848 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middotCO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkmrsquo

EN 43 EN

G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Unit in current text mgkm CO2 is expressed in gkm
G 160915
Current textlsquocoast-through deceleration full let-off of the throttle clutch disengaged and in gear no foothand control actuated no brakes applied If the target speed is 0 kmh (idle) and if the actual vehicle speed is le 5 kmh the clutch may be disengaged the gear shifted to neutral and the brakes used in order to prevent engine stall and to entirely stop the vehicle An upshift is not allowed during a coast-through deceleration The rider may downshift to increase the braking effect of the engine During gear changes extra care shall be afforded to ensure that the gear change is performed promptly with minimum (ie lt 2 seconds) coasting in neutral gear clutch and partial clutch use The vehicle manufacturer may request to extend this time with the agreement of the approval authority if absolutely necessaryrsquo

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 44: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

54 Point 1432 of Appendix 2 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquofor vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG

Equation Ap1-2

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from that assumed for the calculation of normalised consumption a correction factor (cf) may be applied at the manufacturerrsquos request as follows

Equation Ap1-3

FCnorm = (01212 0538) middot (cf) middot ((0825 middot HC) + (0429 middot CO) + (0273 middot CO2))

where HC CO and CO2 tailpipe emissions in gkm

The correction factor is determined as follows

Equation Ap1-4

cf = 0825 + 00693 middot nactual

where

nactual = the actual HC ratio of the fuel used

55 Point 1 in Appendix 33 to Annex VII is amended to read

lsquo1 Measurement of the electric range

11 The following test method set out in point 4 shall be used to measure the electric range expressed in km of vehicles powered by an electric power train only or the electric range and OVC range of vehicles powered by a hybrid electric powertrain with off-vehicle charging (OVC HEV) as defined in Appendix 3

12 Category L1e vehicles designed to pedal referred to in Annex I to Regulation (EU)

EN 44 EN

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 45: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

No 1682013 and in point 112 of Regulation (EU) No 32014 shall be exempted from the electric range testrsquo

56 The table number in point 222 of Annex VIII is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 7-1

read

lsquoTable 8-1rsquo

57 Point 29 is added to Annex IX

lsquo29 Multi-mode noise abatement system

291 L-category vehicles equipped with a manually or electronically controlled multiple mode adjustable exhaust silencer system shall be tested in all modes

292 For vehicles equipped with a noise abatement system as referred to in point 291 the reported sound pressure level shall be for the mode having the highest average sound pressure level

58 Point 2411 of Appendix 3 of Annex IX is amended to read

lsquo2411 Absorbent fibrous material shall be asbestos-free and may be used in the construction of silencers only if it is held securely in place throughout the service life of the silencer and it meets the requirements of point 2412 2413 or 2414rsquo

59 The numbering of Equation Ap21-2 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-2 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

EN 45 EN

G 160915
Current textldquohellipof point 2412 to 2414rdquo
G 160915
Cf UN R63 Annex3 point 323323Un R9 Annex 3 point 32452

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 46: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

60 The numbering of Equation Ap21-3 in point 314 of Appendix 21 of Annex X is amended as follows

For

lsquoEquation Ap21-3 rsquo

read

lsquoEquation Ap21-4 rsquo rsquo

61 Point 212 of Appendix 22 of Annex X is amended to read

No Accessories Fitted for the torque and net power test

1 Air intake system

mdash Induction manifold

mdash Air filter

mdash Induction silencer

mdash Crankcase emission-control system

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

2 Exhaust system

mdash Manifold

mdash Pipe work2310

mdash Silencer23

mdash Exhaust pipe23

mdash Electrical control device where fitted

If series-mounted yes

3 Carburettor If series-mounted yes

4 Fuel injection system

mdash Upstream filter

mdash Filter

mdash Fuel supply pump and high pressure pump if applicable

mdash Compressed air pump in the case of DI air assist

mdash Pipe work

mdash Injector

mdash Air inlet flap2411 where fitted

mdash Fuel pressure flow regulator where

If series-mounted yes

10 23If it is difficult to use the standard exhaust system an exhaust system causing an equivalent pressure drop may be fitted for the test with the agreement of the manufacturer In the test laboratory when the engine is in operation the exhaust gas extraction system shall not cause in the extraction flue at the point where it is connected to the vehiclersquos exhaust system a pressure differing from atmospheric pressure by plusmn 740 Pa (740 mbar) unless before the test the manufacturer accepts a higher back pressure

11 24The air inlet flap shall be that which controls the pneumatic inject pump regulator

EN 46 EN

G 160915
Reintroduced explanatory notes 23 ndash 29 in table

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 47: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

fitted

5 Maximum rotational speed-or power governors If series-mounted yes

6 Liquid-cooling equipment

mdash Radiator

mdash Fan2512

mdash Water Pump

mdash Thermostat2613

If series-mounted yes2714

7 Air cooling

mdash Cowl

mdash Blower25

mdash Cooling temperature-regulating device(s)

mdash Auxiliary bench blower

If series-mounted yes

8 Electrical equipment If series-mounted yes2815

9 Pollution-control devices2916 If series-mounted yes

9 Lubrication system

mdash Oil feederIf series-mounted yes

Table Ap21-1 Accessories to be fitted during the propulsion unit performance test in order to determine torque and net engine powerrsquo

62 Point 33 of Appendix 22 to Annex X is amended to read

lsquoEquation Ap22-2

rsquo

12 25Where a fan or blower may be disengaged the net engine power shall first of all be stated with the fan (or blower) disengaged followed by the net engine power with the fan (or blower) engaged Where a fixed electrically or mechanically-operated fan cannot be fitted on the test bench the power absorbed by that fan shall be determined at the same rotational speeds as those used when the engine power is measured That power is deducted from the corrected power in order to obtain the net power

13 26The thermostat may be locked in the fully open position14 27The radiator fan fan nozzle water pump and thermostat shall on the test bench occupy as far as possible the

same position relative to each other as if they were on the vehicle If the radiator fan fan nozzle water pump or thermostat have a position on the test bench which is different from that on the vehicle this shall be described and noted in the test report The liquid coolant shall be circulated solely by the water pump for the engine It may be cooled either by the engine radiator or by an outside circuit provided that the pressure drops within that circuit remain substantially the same as those in the engine cooling system If fitted the engine blind shall be open

15 28Minimum generator output the generator supplies the current that is strictly needed to supply the accessories that are essential to the operation of the engine The battery shall not receive any charge during the test

16 29Anti-pollution provisions may include for example exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) system catalytic converter thermal reactor secondary air-supply system and fuel-evaporation protecting system

EN 47 EN

G 160915
Exponent number is in current text 12 (wrong)

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 48: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

63 The Table 11-1 in point 31 of Annex XI is amended to read

lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)

Table 11-1

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types I II V VII and VIII

Classification criteria description

Tes

t typ

e V

III(1

)

1 Vehicle

11 category X X X X X X

12 sub-category X X X X X X

13 the inertia of a vehicle variant(s) or version(s) within two inertia categories above or below the nominal inertia category X X X X X

14 overall gear ratios (+- 8) X X X X X

2 Propulsion family characteristics

21 number of engines or electric motors X X X X X X

22 hybrid operation mode(s) (parallel sequential other) X X X X X X

23 number of cylinders of the combustion engine X X X X X X

24 engine capacity (+- 2 )(2) of the combustion engine X X X X X X

25 number and control (variable cam phasing or lift) of combustion engine valves

X X X X X X

26 monofuel bifuel flex fuel H2NG multifuel X X X X X X

27fuel system (carburettor scavenging port port fuel injection direct fuel injection common rail pump-injector other)

X X X X X X

28 fuel storage(3) X X

29 type of cooling system of combustion engine X X X X X X

210 combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other) X X X X X X

211 intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no

X X X X X X

EN 48 EN

G 160915
Amendments marked red in numbering as of point 32 and inserted explanatory 1 in Table header ldquoTest type VIII1rdquo

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 49: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

throttle)

3 Pollution control system characteristics

31 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

32 catalytic converter(s) type X X X X X

321 number and elements of catalytic converters X X X X X

322 size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 ) X X X X X

323 operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)

X X X X X

324 precious metal load (identical or higher) X X X X X

325 precious metal ratio (+- 15 ) X X X X X

326 substrate (structure and material) X X X X X

327 cell density X X X X X

328 type of casing for the catalytic converter(s) X X X X X

33 propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF) X X X X X

331 PF types X X X X X

332 number and elements of PF X X X X X

333 size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 ) X X X X X

334 operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other) X X X X X

335 active surface of PF X X X X X

34 propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system X X X X X

341 periodically regenerating system type X X X X X

342 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

35 propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system X X X X X

351 SCR system type X X X X X

352 operation principle of periodically regenerating system X X X X X

36 propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

361 lean NOx trap absorber type X X X X X

362 operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber X X X X X

EN 49 EN

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes
Page 50: circabc.europa.eu · Web viewInstallation of lighting (motorcycle) Supplement 14 to the 01 series of amendments OJ L 166, 18.6.2013, p. 55 L3e 56 Headlamps for mopeds and vehicles

37 propulsion (not) equipped with a cold-start device or starting aid device(s) X X X X X

371 cold-start or starting aid device type X X X X X

372 operation principle of cold start or starting aid device(s) X X X X X X

373Activation time of cold-start or starting aid device(s) and or duty cycle (only limited time activated after cold start continuous operation)

X X X X X X

38 propulsion (not) equipped with O2 sensor for fuel control X X X X X X

381 O2 sensor types X X X X X X

382 operation principle of O2 sensor (binary wide range other) X X X X X X

383 O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation) X X X X X X

39 propulsion (not) equipped with exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system X X X X X

391 EGR system types X X X X X

392 operation principle of EGR system (internal external) X X X X X

393 maximum EGR rate (+- 5 ) X X X X X

Explanatory notes

(1) The same family criteria also apply to functional on-board diagnostics set out in Annex XII of Regulation (EU) No 442014

(2) maximum 30 acceptable for test type VIII

(3) Only for vehicles equipped with storage for gaseous fuel

rsquo

64 The header of Table 11-2 in Point 32 of Annex XI is amended as follows

For

lsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types IIIrsquo

read

lsquolsquoTable 11-2

Classification criteria propulsion family with regard to test types III and IVrsquo

EN 50 EN

  • 1 CONTEXT OF THE DELEGATED ACT
  • 2 CONSULTATIONS PRIOR TO THE ADOPTION OF THE ACT
  • 3 LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE DELEGATED ACT
    • Engine capacity
    • Minimum (hours)
    • Maximum (hours)
    • lt 170 cm3
    • 6
    • 36
    • 170 cm3 le engine capacity lt 280 cm3
    • 8
    • ge 280 cm3
    • 12
    • lsquo 2 Carbon canister ageing
    • Figure Ap32-1
    • Carbon canister gas flow diagram and ports
    • lsquo312 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the full distance accumulation phase with a frequency and amount of type I test procedures at the choice of the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the technical service and approval authority The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to environmental performance as placed on the market (see Figure 5-1)
    • lsquo322 Multiple type I emission tests shall be conducted during the partial distance accumulation phase with the frequency and number of type I test procedures chosen by the manufacturer The type I emission test results shall provide sufficient statistical relevance to identify the deterioration trend which shall be representative of the vehicle type with regard to the environmental performance placed on the market (see Figure 5-2)
      • ge 14 kW
      • 4
      • 3
      • 130 kmh le vmax
      • -
        • lsquoTest types I II V VII and VIII (lsquoXrsquo in Table 11-1 means lsquoapplicablersquo)
        • Classification criteria description
        • Test type I
        • Test type II
        • Test type V
        • Test type VII
        • Test type VIII(1)
        • Stage I
        • Stage II
        • X
        • X
        • type of cooling system of combustion engine
        • combustion cycle (PI CI two-stroke four-stroke other)
        • intake air system (naturally aspirated charged (turbocharger super-charger) intercooler boost control) and air induction control (mechanical throttle electronic throttle control no throttle)
        • 3
        • Pollution control system characteristics
        • 31
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with catalytic converter(s)
        • catalytic converter(s) type
        • 321
        • number and elements of catalytic converters
        • 322
        • size of catalytic converters (volume of monolith(s) +- 15 )
        • 323
        • operation principle of catalytic activity (oxidising three-way heated SCR other)
        • 324
        • precious metal load (identical or higher)
        • precious metal ratio (+- 15 )
        • substrate (structure and material)
        • cell density
        • type of casing for the catalytic converter(s)
        • 33
        • propulsion exhaust (not) equipped with particulate filter (PF)
        • PF types
        • number and elements of PF
        • size of PF (volume of filter element +- 10 )
        • operation principle of PF (partial wall-flow other)
        • active surface of PF
        • 34
        • propulsion (not) equipped with periodically regenerating system
        • periodically regenerating system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 35
        • propulsion (not) equipped with selective catalytic converter reduction (SCR) system
        • SCR system type
        • operation principle of periodically regenerating system
        • 36
        • propulsion (not) equipped with lean NOx trap absorber
        • 361
        • lean NOx trap absorber type
        • 362
        • operation principle of lean NOx trap absorber
        • 37
        • 371
        • 372
        • 373
        • 38
        • 381
        • 382
        • 383
        • O2 sensor interaction with closed-loop fuelling system (stoichiometry lean or rich operation)
        • 39
        • 391
        • 392
        • Explanatory notes